Mathura Mahatmya

Mathura Mahatmya
Text 1
harir api bhajamänebhyaù

präyo muktim- dadäti na tu bhaktim
vihita-tad-unnati-satram-
mäthure dhanyam- nämämi tväm
harir-Hari; api-even; bhajamänebhyaù -worshiping; präyaù-for the most part; muktim-liberation;

dadäti-gives; na-not; tu-but; bhaktim-bhakti; vihita-placed; tad-unnati-satram-great sacrifice; mäthure-
in Mathurä; dhanyam-auspicious; nämämi-obeisaëes; tväm-to you.
Generally Lord Hari gives mukti, but not bhakti, to his worshipers. O Mathurä, to you, who gives a
great sacrifice of pure bhakti and who are very auspicious, I offer my respectful obeisances.
Text 2
dhanyänäà hådayänanda-
pradaà saìgåhyate mudä
mähätmyaà mathurä-puryäù
sarva-tértha-çiromaëeù
dhanyänäm-of the fortunate; hådayänanda-bliss to the hearts; pradam-giving; saìgåhyate-collected;

mudä-happily; mähätmyam-glorificaion;mathurä-puryäù-of Mathurä; sarva-tértha-çiromaëeù-the crest
jewel of all holy places.
This glorification of Mathurä-puré, which is the crest jewel of all holy places, has been very happily
collected. It gives joy to the hearts of the fortunate.
Text 3
taträsyäù päpa-häritvam. ädi-värähe
viàçatiù yojanänäà tu
mathuräà mama maëòalam
yatra tatra naro snäto
mucyate sarva-pätakaiù
tatra-there; äsyäù-of that; päpa-häritvam-removal of sin; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa;

viàçatiù'twenty; yojanänäm-yojanas; tu-indeed; mathuräàMathurä; mama-My; maëòalam-circle; yatra-
where; tatra-there; naraù-a person; snätaù-bathed; mucyate-is liberated; sarva-pätakaiù-from all sins.
Mathura' Removes Sins
In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:
My abode of Mathura'-maëòala is 20 yojanas in circumferance. A person who stays there becomes

free from all sins.
Text 4
pade pade tértha-phalaà

mathuräyä vasundhare
yatra tatra naro snäto
mucyate ghora-kilbiñaiù
pade pade-at every step; tértha-phalam-result of visiting holy places; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä;
vasundhare-O earth-goddess; yatra-where; tatra-there; naraù-a person; snätaù-bathed; mucyate-
liberated; ghora-kilbiñaiù-from the most terrible sins.
With every step he takes in Mathura' he gets the result of going to all other holy places. O earth-
goddess, any person who bathes in Mathurä becomes free from the most terrible sins.
Text 5
sarva-dharma-vihinänäà
puruñänäà durätmanäm
narakärti-harä devi
mathurä päpa-ghätiné
sarva-dharma-vihinänäm-devoid of religion; puruñänäm- of persons; durätmanäm-wicked;

narakärti-harä-removing the sufferings of hell; devi-O goddess; mathurä-Mathurä; päpa-ghätiné-
destroying sins.
O goddess, Mathura' rescues the irreligious from the sufferings of hell and removes their sins.
Text 6
kåtaghnaç ca suräpaç ca
cauro bhagna-vratas tathä
mathuräà präpya manujä
mucyate sarva-kilbiñaiù
kåtaghnaù-ungrateful; ca-and; suräpaù-drunkards; ca-and; cauraù-thief; bhagna-vrataù-broken vows;
tathä-then; mathuräm-Mathurä; präpya-attaining; manujäù-persons; mucyate-liberated; sarva-kilbiñaiù-
from all sins.
Ungrateful persons, drunkards, thieves, and they who have broken vows, become free from all sins
when they enter Mathura'
Text 7-8
süryodare tamo naçyed

yathä vajra-bhayän nagäù
tarkñaà dåñövä yathä sarpä
meghä vata-hatä iva
tattva-jïänad yathä duhkhaà

siàhaà dåñövä yathä mågaù
tathä päpäni naçyanti
mathurä-darçanät kñaëät
süryodare-in the sunrise; tamaù-darkness; naçyed-destroyed; yathä-as; vajra-bhayän-from fear of the

goad; nagäù-elephants; tarkñam-Garuòa; dåñövä-seeing; yathä-as; sarpäù-snakes;; meghäh-clouds;
vata-hatä-broken by the wind; iva-like; tattva-jïänad-because of knowledge of the truth; yathä-as;
duhkham-suffering; siàham-a lion; dåñövä-having seen; yathä-as; mågaù-deer; tathä-in that way;
päpäni-sins; naçyanti-perish; mathurä-darçanät-from the sight of Mathurä; kñaëät-in a moment.
As darknress is destroyed by the rising of the sun, as elephants fear the goad, as snakes that have
seen Garuòa, as clouds broken by the wind, as unhappiness destroyed by knowledge, and as deer that
have seen a lion, so are sins destroyed by the sight of Mathurä.
Text 9
çraddhayä bhakti-yuktaç ca
gatvä madhupuréà naraù
brahmahäpi viçuddhyeta
kià punaù tö anya-pätaké
çraddhayä-with faith; bhakti-yuktaù-and devotion; ca-and; gatvä-going; madhupurém-to Mathurä;

naraù-a person; brahmahä-killer of a brähmaëa; api-even; viçuddhyeta-is purified; kim- punaù-what to
speak; tu-indeed; anya-pätaké-of other sins.
A person who with faith and devotion goes to Mathurä becomes free from the sin of killing a
brähmaëa, what to speak of other sins.
Text 10
mathurä-snäna-kämasyä gacchatas tu pade pade
niräçäni vrajanty asya
päpäny eva çarérataù
mathurä-snäna-kämasya-of a person who desires to bathe in Mathurä; gacchataù-going; tu-indeed;

pade pade-at every step; niräçäni-giving up hope; vrajanti-go; asya-of him; päpäni-sins; eva-indeed;
çarérataù-from the body.
For one who, desiring to bathe in Mathurä, goes there, at every step sins, giving up all hope, leave
his body.
Text 11
anusaìgena gacchan hi
vänijyenäpi sevayä
mathurä-snäna-mätreëa
päpaà tyaktvä divaà vrajet
anusaìgena-contact; gacchan-going; hi-indeed; vänijyena-on business; api-even; sevayä-with

service; mathurä-in Mathurä; snäna-mätreëa-only by bathing; päpam-sins; tyaktvä-abandoning; divam-
to the spiritual world; vrajet-goes.
One who, going to Mathurä only on business, takes a bathe there becomes free from all sins and
goes to the spiritual world.
Text 12
nämäni gåhëatäm asyäù

sadaiva tö amhasaù kñayaù
sadä kåta-yugaà cätra
sadä caivottaräyaëam
nämäni-names; gåhëatäm-taking; asyäù-of it; sadä-always; eva-indeed; tu-certainly; amhasaù'sins;

kñayaù-destroyed; sadä-always; kåta-yugam-Satya-yuga; ca-and; atra-here; sadä-always; ca-and; eva-
indeed; uttaräyaëam-Uttaräyaëa.
For one who always chants the name of Mathurä sins are always destroyed. For him it is always
Satya-yuga. For him it is always the auspicious time of Uttaräyaëa.
Text 13
yaù çåëoti varärohe

mäthuraà mama maëòalam
anyenoccaritaà çaçvat
so 'pi päpaiù pramucyate
yaù-who; çåëoti-hears; varärohe-O beautiful girl; mäthuram-Mathurä; mama-My; maëòalam-circle;
anyena-by another; uccaritam-spoken; çaçvat-always; saù api-he; päpaiù-from sins; pramucyate-free.
O beautiful one, he who hears from others about my Mathurä-maëòala is always free from sin.
Text 14
tri-rätram api ye tatra

vasanti manujä mune
teñäà punanti niyataà
spåñöaç caraëa-reëavaù
tri-rätram-three nights; api-even; ye-who; tatra-there; vasanti-reside; manujäh-people; mune'O sage;

teñäm-of them; punanti-purify; niyatam-always; spåñöaù-touched; caraëa-of the feet; reëavaù-dust.
O sage, to touch of the dust of the feet of they who live for three nights there purifies one.
Text 15
pädme pätäla-khaëòe hara-gauré-samväde
kåñëa-kréòä-karaà sthänaà
mathuräyäs tataà bhuvi
puëyä madhupuré yatra
sarva-päpa-pranäçiné
pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; pätäla-khaëòe-Patala-khaëòa; hara-gauré-samväde-in the conversation

between Çiva and Gauré; kåñëa-kréòä-karam- Kåñëa's pastimes;sthänam-place; mathuräyäù-of
Mathurä; tatam-manifest; bhuvi-on earth; puëyä-sacred; madhupuré-Mathurä; yatra-where; sarva-päpa-
all sins;pranäçiné-destroying.
In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, in a conversation between Lord Çiva and Gauré, it is said:
On this earth the shore of the Yamunä is the place where Lord Kåñëa enjoys pastiumes. On that
shore is sacred Mathura' puré, which destroys all sins.
Text 16
yathä tåëa-samühaà tu
jvälayanti sphuliìgikäùtathä mahänti päpäni
dahate mathurä-puré
yathä-as; tåëa-samüham-grass; tu-indeed; jvälayanti-burns; sphuliìgikäù-sparks; tathä-so;

mahänti'great; päpäni-sins; dahate-burns; mathurä-puré-Mathurä.
As sparks set grass on fire, so does Mathurä-puré burn the greatest sins.
Text 17
skände käçé-khaëòe
hådyaà madhuvanaà präyo

yamunäyäs taöe mahat
ädyaà bhagavataù sthänaà
yat puëyaà hari-medhasaù
päpo 'pi jantus tat präpya
niñpäpo jäyate dhruvam
skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; käçé-khaëòe-Kasi-khaëòa; hådyam-charming; madhuvanam-

Madhuvana; präyaù-for the most part; yamunäyäù-of the Yamunä; taöe'on the shore; mahat-great;
ädyam-transcendental; bhagavataù-of the Lord; sthänam-place; yat-which; puëyam-sacred; hari-
medhasaù-fixed their hearts on Lord Hari» päpaù-sin; api-even; jantuù-person; tat-that; präpya-
attaining; niñpäpaù-sinless; jäyate-born; dhruvam-indeed.
In the Skanda Puräëa, Käçé-khaëòa, it is said:
The charming forest of Madhuvana is situated on the shore of the Yamunä. Madhuvana is the
original place of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. It is very sacred to they whose hearts are fixed
on Lord Hari. A sinful man who goes there becomes at once free from all sins.
Text 18
atha puëya-pradatvaà yathä ädi-värähe
yat puëyam açvamedhena

yat puëyaà räjasüyataù
mathuräyäà tad äpnoti
tri-rätra-çayanäd yamé
atha-now; puëya-pradatvam-granting pious merit; yathä-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa;

yat-which; puëyam-piety; açvamedhena-by an asvamedha-yajna; yat-which; puëyam-piety;
räjasüyataù-from a rajasuya-yajna; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tad-that; äpnoti-attains; tri-rätra-for three
nights; çayanäd-by resting; yamé-self-controlled.
Mathura' Grants Pious Merit

The pious merit attained by performing an açvamedha-yajïa and the pious merit attained by
performing a räjasüya-yajïa is at once attained by a self-controlled person who stays for three nights in
Mathurä.
Text 19
viàçatir yojanänäà tu
pade pade 'çvamedhéyaà
puëyaà nätra vicaraëä
viàçatir yojanänäm-20 yojanas; tu-indeed; mäthuram- mama maëòalam-My circle of Mathurä; pade
pade-at every step; açvamedhéyam-of an asvamedha-yajna; puëyam-piety; na-not; atra-here; vicaraëä-
doubt.
My Mathura'-maëòala is 20 yojanas (160 miles, in size. With every step there one attains the piety
of perfoming an açvamedha-yajïa. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 20
snänena sarva-térthänäà
yat syät sukåta-saïcayaù
tato 'dhikataraà proktaà
mäthure sarva-maëòale
snänena-by bathing; sarva-térthänäm-of all holy places; yat-what; syät-is; sukåta-saïcayaù'piety;

tataù-than that; adhikataram-greater; proktam-said; mäthure sarva-maëòale-in the circle of Mathurä.
In Mathurä-maëòala one attains piety greater than what is attained by bathing in all other holy
places.
Text 21
caturëäm api vedänäà

puëyam adhyayanäc ca yat
tat puëyaà jäyate puàsäà
mathuräà vadatäà satäm
caturëäm api vedänäm-of the four Vedas; puëyam-piety; adhyayanät-from study; ca-and; yat'what;
tat-that; puëyam-piety; jäyate-is born; puàsäm-of persons; mathuräm-Mathurä; vadatäm-saying; satäm-
saints.
The same piety that is attained by studying the four Vedas is also attained by a saintly devotee who
speak the word Mathurä.
Text 22
svodbhava-päpa-häritvam. yathä ädi-värähe
anyatra hi kåtaà päpaà

tértham äsädya naçyati
térthe tu yat kåtaà päpaà
vajra-lepo bhaved dhruvam
svodbhava-manifest in itself; päpa-sins; häritvam-removal; yathä-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha

Puräëa; anyatra-in any other place; hi-certainly; kåtam-performed; päpam-sin; tértham-holy place;
äsädya-attaining; naçyati-perishes; térthe-in the holy place; tu-but; yat-what; kåtam-done; päpam-sin;
vajra-of a thunderbolt; lepaù-the licking; bhaved-becomes; dhruvam-certainly.
Mathura' Removes the Sins Performed There
This is described in the Ädi-varäha Purana:
Sins performed in some other place become destroyed when they approach a holy place of
pilgrimage. However, sins performed at a holy place of pilgrimage become like the licking of lightning
bolt.
Text 23
mathuräyäà kåtaà päpaà

mathuräyäà vinaçyati
jïänato 'jïänato 'väpi
yat päpaà samupärjitam-
sukåtaà duñkåtaà väpi
mathuräyäà praëaçyati
mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; kåtam-done; päpam-sins; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vinaçyati-perishs;

jïänataù-of the wise; ajïänataù-of the ignorant; vä-or; api-and; yat-which; päpam-sins; samupärjitam-
attained; sukåtam-pious; duñkåtam-impious; vä-or; api-and; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; praëaçyati-
perishes.
Sins performed at Mathurä become destroyed at Mathurä. Whether one is wise, or ignorant, saintly
or wicked, his sins become destroyed at Mathurä.
Text 24
yatra kåñëena saïcérëaà

kréòitaà ca yathä-sukham
cakräìkita-padä tena
sthäne brahmamaye çubhe
yatra-where; kåñëena-by Kåñëa; saïcérëam-filled; kréòitam-enjoyed pastimes; ca-and; yathä-

sukham-according to happiness; cakra-with the cakra; aìkita-marked; padä-feet; tena-by Him; sthäne-
place; brahmamaye-spiritual; çubhe-auspicious.
In this beautiful spiritual place Lord Kåñëa, whose feet are marked with a cakra, enjoyed
transcendental pastimes to his heart's content.
Text 25
eñä divyä puré devi

nitya-kälaà su-gopitä
bhaktä tvaà mama siñyä ca
kathitä te vasundhare
eñä-this; divyä-transcendental; puré-city; devi-O goddess; nitya-kälam-eternally; su-gopitä-hidden;

bhaktä-devotee; tvam-you; mama-My» siñyä-disciple; ca-and; kathitä-spoken; te-to you; vasundhare-O
earth-goddess.
O goddess, this transcendental city is eternally hidden with great care. O earth-goddess, because you
are My devotee and My disciple, it is now described to you.
Text 26
na mayä kathitaà devi

brahmaëaç ca mahätmanaù
rudrasya na mayä pürvaà
kathitaà ca vasundhare
mayä su-gopitaà hy etad
guhyäd guhyatamaà småtam
na-not; mayä-by Me; kathitam-described; devi-O goddess; brahmaëaù-Brahmä; ca-and;

mahätmanaù'great soul; rudrasya-Çiva; na-not; mayä-by Me; pürvam-previously; kathitam-said; ca-
and; vasundhare-O earth; mayä-by Me; su-gopitam-hidden; hi-indeed; etad-this; guhyäd guhyatamam-
småtam-greatest secret.
O goddess, I have not described this to the brähmaëas and the great souls. I have not described it to
Lord Çiva. O earth-goddess, it has been carefully hidden by Me because I consider it the most
confidential of all secrets.
Text 27
anyatra daçabhir varñaiù
prärabdhaà bhujyate tu yat
kilbiñaà tan mahä-devi
mäthure daçabhir dinaiù
anyatra-in another place; daçabhir varñaiù-for 10 years; prärabdham-beginnings; bhujyate-

experienced; tu-indeed; yat-what; kilbiñam-sin; tat-that; mahä-devi-O goddess; mäthure-in Mathurä;
daçabhir dinaiù-in 10 days.
O goddess, sins that fester for 10 years in other places are destroyed in Mathurä in 10 days.
Text 28
atha sarva-térthädhikatvam. yatha ädi-värähe
na vidyate hi pätäle
näntarékñe na mänuñe
samaà tu mathuräyä hi
térthe mama vasundhare
atha-now; sarva-of all; tértha-holy places; adhikatvam-superiority; yatha-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-
varäha Puräëa; na-not; vidyate-is; hi-indeed; pätäle-in hell; na-not; antarékñe-in heaven; na-not;
mänuñe-in the world of men; samam-equal; tu-certainly; mathuräyä-to Mathurä; hi-certainly; térthe-
holy place; mama-My; vasundhare-O earth.
Mathurä Is the Best of All Sacred Places
O earth-goddess, neither in hell, heaven, nor in the world of humans, is there any sacred place equal
to Mathurä.
Text 29
tatra dharaëé-praçnaù
naimiñaà puñkaraà caiva

puréà väräëaséà tathäetän hitvä mahä-bhäga
mathuräà kià praçaàsasi
tatra-there; dharaëé-of the earth; praçnaù-question; naimiñam-Naimiñäraëya; puñkaram-Puñkara;

ca-and; eva-indeed; purém-city» väräëasém-Väräëasé; tathä-that; etän-these; hitvä-ignoring; mahä-
bhäga-O auspicious Lord; mathuräm-Mathurä; kim-why?; praçaàsasi-You glorify.
The the Earth-goddess Asked:

There are Naimiñäraëya, Lake Puñkara, and the city of Väräëasé. O auspicious Lord, why do You
ignore them and glorify Mathurä?
Text 30
çré-varähenoktam mathureti su-vikhyätam

asti kñetraà paraà mama
su-ramyä ca praçastä ca
janma-bhümiù priyä mama
çré-varähena-by Lord varäha; uktam-said; mathurä-Mathurä; iti-thus; su-vikhyätam-famous; asti'is;

kñetram-place; param-transcendental; mama-My; su-ramyä-charming; ca-and; praçastä-glorious; ca-
and; janma-bhümiù-birthplace; priyä-dear; mama-to me.
Lord Varäha said:
Mathura' is famous as my supreme abode. It is beautiful and glorious. It is the place where I took
birth. It is very dear to Me.
Text 31
sarveñäà devi térthänäà

mathuräà paramäà mahät
kåñëena kréòitaà yatra
tä ca çuddhaà pade pade
sarveñäm-of all; devi-o goddess; térthänäm-holy place; mathuräm-Mathurä; paramäm-best; mahat-

great; kåñëena-by Kåñëa; kréòitam-played; yatra-where; tac-which; ca-and;û çuddham-pure; pade
pade-at every step.
O goddess, Mathura' is the greatest of all holy places. Kåñëa enjoys pastimes there. It purifies one at
every step.
Text 32
cakräìkitaà hi tat sarvaà kåñëasyaiva padena tu

bäla-kréòana-rüpäëi
kåtäni saha gopakaiù
cakräìkitam-marked with the cakra; hi-indeed; tat-that; sarvam-all; kåñëasya-of Kåñëa; eva-indeed;
padena-by the foot; tu-indeed; bäla-kréòana-rüpäëi-in childhood pastimes; kåtäni-done; saha'with;
gopakaiù-the gopas.
It is completely covered with Kåñëa footprints. Kåñëa enjoys childhood pastimes there with the
cowherd boys.
Text 33
yäni térthäni täny eva

sthapitäni majarñibhiù
etat te kathitaà säraà
mayä satyena suvrate
yäni-which; térthäni-holy place; täni-they; eva-indeed; sthapitäni-established; majarñibhiù-by great

sages; etat-this; te-to you; kathitam-spoken; säram-essence; mayä-by Me; satyena'in truth; suvrate-O
saintly girl.
The great sages have discovered the holy places places of Mathurä. O saintly one, I have thus
truthfully described the essence of Mathura' to you.
Text 34
na térthaà mathuräyä hi
na devaù keçavät paraù
na-not; tértham-holy place; mathuräyäh-than Mathurä; hi-indeed; na-not; devaù-demigod; keçavät-

than Kåñëa; paraù-greater.
No holy place is better than Mathurä, and no demigod is better than Lord Keçava.
Text 35
värähe
çåëu tattvena me bhümi

kathyamänam atho 'naghe
mathureti su-vikhyätä
yasmin kñetre priyä mama
värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; çåëu-listen; tattvena-in truth; me-My; bhümi-O earth; kathyamänam-
saying; athaù-then; anaghe-O sinless one; mathurä-Mathurä; iti-thus; su-vikhyätä-very famous; yasmin-
in which; kñetre-place; priyä-beloved; mama-My.
In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

O earth-goddess, please listen and I shall tell you the truth. O sinless one, Mathura' is very famous
as the place where my beloved Rädha' stays.
Text 36
su-ramyä su-praçastä ca
janma-bhümir mama priye
bhaviñyati varärohe
dväpare saàsthite yuge
su-ramyä-beautiful; su-praçastä-glorious; ca-and; janma-bhümir-birthplace; mama-My; priye-O

beloved; bhaviñyati-will be; varärohe-O beautiful girl; dväpare saàsthite yuge-in Dväpara-yuga.
O dear one, O beautiful one, delightful and famous Mathura' is the place where I will take birth in
the Dväpara-yuga.
Text 37
yayäti-nåpa-vaàçe 'ham
utpatsyämi vasundhare
çatäni païca varñänäm
atra sthasyämi niçcayaù
yayäti-nåpa-vaàçe-in the dynasty of King Yayati; aham-I; utpatsyämi-will take birth; vasundhare-O
earth» çatäni-hundreds; païca-five; varñänäm-years; atra-here; sthasyämi'I will stay; niçcayaù-certainly.
O earth-goddess, I will take birth in the dynasty of King Yayäti and I will stay here for 500 years.
Text 38
skände mathura-khaëòe närada-väkyam
çåëu dharmaà mahä-präjïa

yat tvaà påcchasi dharma-vit
gopyaà sapta-puréëäà tu
mäthura-maëòalaà småtaà
skände mathura-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; närada-väkyam-Närada's

statement; çåëu-please listen; dharmam-religion; mahä-präjïa-O intelligent one; yat-what; tvam-you;
påcchasi-ask; dharma-vit-O knower of religion; gopyam-hidden; sapta-puréëäm-of the seven cities; tu-
indeed; mäthura-maëòalam-Mathurä; småtam-is considered.
In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, Närada said:
O wise one, O knower of religion, please listen to the answer to the question you have asked.
Mathura'-maëòala is known to be the most confidential of the seven holy cities.
Text 39
triàçad-varña-sahasräëi
triàçad-varña-çatäni ca
yat phalam bhärate varñe
tat phalaà mathuräà smaran
triàçad-varña-sahasräëi-thirty thousand years; triàçad-varña-çatäni-three thousand years; ca-and; yat

phalam-the result; bhärate varñe-on earth; tat phalam-that result; mathuräm-Mathurä; smaran-
remembering.
The pious result attained by three thousand years or thirty thousand years of endeavor on earth is
attained by simply once remembering Mathurä.
Text 40
tathä hi ädi-värähe
mahä-mäghyaà prayäge ca
yat phalaà labhate naraù
tat phalaà labhate devi
mathuräyäà dine dine
tathä hi-furthermore; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mahä-mäghyam-on maha'-mägha;

prayäge-at Prayäga; ca-and; yat phalam-the result; labhate-attains; naraù-a person; tat phalam-that
result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; dine dine-any day.
The pious result one attains on the Maha'-mägha sacred day at Prayäga is attained on any day in
Mathurä.
Text 41
kärttikyäà caiva yat puëyaà

puñkare tu vasundhare
tat phalaà labhate martyo mathuräyäà dine dine
kärttikyäm-during Kärttika; ca-and; eva-certainly; yat puëyam-the piety; puñkare-at Puñkara; tu-
indeed; vasundhare-O earth; tat phalam-that result; labhate-attains; martyaù-a human; mathuräyäm-at
Mathurä» dine dine-any day.
O earth-goddess, the pious result one attains during the month of Kärttika at Puñkara Lake is
attained on any day in Mathurä.
Text 42
väräëasyäà tu yat puëyaà

rähu-graste diväkare
mathuräyäà jitendriyaù
väräëasyäm-at varanasi; tu-indeed; yat puëyam-the piety; rähu-graste diväkare-during a solar

eclipse; tat phalam-that result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-at Mathurä» jitendriyaù-a
person who controls his senses.
O goddess, the pious reult one attains on a solar eclipse in Väräëasé is attained in Mathura' by a
person who controls his senses.
Text 43
pürëe varñe sahasre tu

väräëasyäà tu yat phalam
mathuräyäà kñaëena hi
pürëe varñe sahasre-after a thousand years; tu-indeed; väräëasyäm-at Väräëasé; tu-indeed; yat
phalam'that result; tat phalam-that result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-at Mathurä»
kñaëena-in a moment; hi-indeed.
O goddess, the pious result one attains at Väräëasé after a thousand years in attained at Mathura' in a
single moment.
Text 44
pädme pätäla-khaëòe
pürëe varña-sahasre tu
tértha-räjeñu yat phalam
mathuräyäà dine dine
pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khand; pürëe varña-sahasre-after a thousand

years; tu-indeed; tértha-räjeñu'at the kings of holy places; yat phalam tat phalam-the same result;
labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; dine dine-any day.
In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, it is said:
O goddess, the same pious result one attains at Prayäga, the king of holy places, by staying there for
a thousand years is attained every day at Mathurä.
Text 45
godävaré-dvädaçako naro yaù

kñetre kurüëäà kñiti-däyako yaù
ñaë-mäsakän sädhayate gayäyäà
samaà bhaven no dinam ekaà mäthure
godävaré-by the Godävaré; dvädaçakaù-twelve; naro yaù-a person who; kñetre kurüëäm-at
Kurukñetra; kñiti-däyakaù-giving land; yaù-who; ñan„-mäsakän-for siø months; sädhayate-staying;
gayäyäm-at gayä; samam-equal; bhavet-not; naù-not» dinam-day; ekam-one; mäthure-in Mathurä.
A person who lives for twelve months on the shore of the Godävaré, who gives a gift of land at
Kurukñetra, or who lives for six months at Gayä, is not equal to a person who lives for a single day at
Mathurä.
Text 46
na dvärakä käçé käïcé na mäyä

gadäbhåto yasya samaà na tértham
santarpitä yad yamunä-jalena
väïchanti no pitaraù piëòa-dänam
na-not; dvärakä-Dvaraka; käçé-Väräëasé; käïcé-Kanci; na-not; mäyä-Maya; gadäbhåtaù-of Lord

Kåñëa; yasya-of whom; samam-equal; na-not; tértham-holy place; santarpitä-satisfied; yad-which;
yamunä-of the yamunä; jalena-with water;û väïchanti-desire; naù-not; pitaraù-the pitäs; piëòa-dänam-
piëòa.
Neither Dvärakä, Käçé, Kaïcé, nor Mäya' are equal to Lord Kåñëa's place of Mathurä. Pleased by
the offering of Yamuna' water there, the pitäs do not desire offerings of piëòa.
Text 47
ata evottara-khaëòe
mathuräyäà prakurvanté puré-sädhäraëé-dåçäm

ye naräs te 'pi vijïeyäù
päpa-räçibhir anvitäù
ataù eva-therefore; uttara-khaëòe-in the Uttara-khaëòa; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; prakurvanti-do;

puré-sädhäraëé-an ordinary city;dåçäm-seeing; ye-which; naräù-people; te api-they; vijïeyäù-known;
päpa-räçibhir-with sins; anvitäù-filled.
In the Uttara-khaëòa it is said:
They who think that Mathurä is an ordinary city are known to be filled with great sins.
Text 48
çré-kåñëäkhyaà paraà brahma

yatra kréòati sarvadä
tad-anyäkhila-térthebhyo
'dhikaà yat tat kim ucyate
çré-kåñëäkhyam-named Lord Kåñëa; param- brahma-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; yatra-

where; kréòati-enjoys pastimes; sarvadä-eternally; tad-anyäkhila-térthebhyaù-than all other holy
places; adhikam-greater; yat tat-that; kim ucyate-what more need be said?
The the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa, enjoys pastimes there eternally. For this
reason it is better than all other holy places. What more need be said?
Text 49
nirväëa-khaëòe ca
taà puréà präpya mathuräà

madéyäà sura-durlabhäm
khaïo bhütvändhako väpi
präëän eva parityajet
nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirvaana-khaëòa; ca-also; tam- purém-that city; präpya-attaining; mathuräm-

Mathura'; madéyäm-My; sura-durlabhäm-difficult for the demigods to attain; khaïaù-a cripple; bhütvä-
becoming; andhakaù-a blind man; vä-or; api-even; präëän-life; eva-indeed; parityajet-leaving.
In the Nirväëa-khaëòa it is said:
A blind man or a cripple who dies in my city of Mathurä, which even the demigods cannot attain,
will attain My eternal abode.
Text 50
pätäla-khaëòe ca
na dåñöä mathurä yena

didåkñä yasya jäyate
yatra tatra måtasyäpi
mäthure janma jäyate
pätäla-khaëòe-in the Patala-khaëòa; ca-and; na-not; dåñöä-seen; mathurä-Mathurä; yena-by whom;

didåkñä-desiring to see; yasya-of whom; jäyate'is born; yatra-where; tatra-there; måtasya-dead; api-
even; mäthure-in Mathurä; janma-birth; jäyate-is born.
In the Pätäla-khaëòa Puräëa it is also said:
He who deos not see Mathurä, although he yearns to see it, will take birth after his death in Mathurä.
Text 51
asaìkhya-térthäçrayatvam. yathä ädi-värähe
ñañöi-koöi-sahasräëi
ñañti-koöi-çatäni ca
tértha-saìkhyä tu vasudhe
mathuräyäà mayoditä
asaìkhya-numberless; tértha-of holy places; äçrayatvam-the condition of being the shelter; yathä-as;
ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; ñañöi-koöi-sahasräëi ñañti-koöi-çatäni ca-60 billion; tértha-
saìkhyä-holy place; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; mayä-by Me; uditä-manifest.
Mathura' Is the Shelter of Numberless Holy Places
O earth-goddess, 60 billion sacred places reside in My Mathurä.
Text 52
skände mathura-khaëòe
bhüme rajäàsi gaëanä

kälenäpi bhaven nåpa
mäthure yäni térthäni
teñäà saìkhyä na vartate
skände mathura-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; bhüme-O earth; rajäàsi-dust;
gaëanä-counting; kälena-in time; api-even; bhavet-may be; nåpa-O king; mäthure-in Mathurä; yäni-
which; térthäni-holy places; teñäm-of them; saìkhyä-counting;û na-not; vartate-is.
In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:
O king, in the course of time it may be possible to count the grains of dust on the earth, but it will
not be possible to count the number of holy places in Mathurä.
Text 53
atha niväsopadeçaù. pädme pätäla-khaëòe
kuru bhoù kuru bho väsaà

mathuräyäù puréà prati
yatra gopyaç ca govindas
trailokyasya prakäçakaù
atha-now; niväsa-residence; upadeçaù-instruction; pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the padma Puräëa,

Patala-khaëòa; kuru-do; bhoù-Oh; kuru-do; bhaù-Oh; väsam-residence; mathuräyäù purém- prati-in
Mathurä; yatra-where; gopyaù-the gopis; ca-and; govindaùKåñëa; trailokyasya-of the three worlds;
prakäçakaù-creator.
Instruction to Reside in Mathurä
In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-kanda, it is said»
Reside in Mathurä! Reside in Mathurä, where the gopés, and Lord Govinda, who created the three
worlds, live.
Text 54
re re saàsära-magnädya
sikñäm ekäà tu me çåëu
yadécchasi sukhaà sändraà
väsaà kuru madhoù pure
re-Oh; re-Oh; saàsära-in birth and death;magna-plunged; adya-today; sikñäm-instruction; ekäm-one;

tu-indeed; me-from Me; çåëu-please hear; yadi-if; icchasi-you desire; sukham-happiness; sändram-
intense; väsam-residence; kuru-do; madhoù pure-in Mathurä.
O people plunged in the ocean of birth and death, please hear this one teaching: if you desire intense
bliss, then please reside in Mathura'.
Text 55
yadéccheù pära-saàsäraà
vahitraà mäthuraà kuru
nauko sa prerakaù kåñëo
bhoù çive pära-kärakaù
yadi-if; iccheù-you desire; pära-the other shore; saàsäram-birth and death; vahitram-boat;
mäthuram-Mathurä; kuru-make; naukaù-a boat; sah-He; prerakaù-captain; kåñëaù-Kåñëa; bhoù-Oh;
çive-O Gauré; pära-kärakaù-taking to the other shore.
O Gauré, if you desire to cross the ocean of repeated birth and death, then reside in Mathurä.
Mathura' is a strong boat, and Kåñëa, the captain of this strong boat, will lead you to the other shore.
Text 56
aho loko mahän andho

netra-yukto na paçyati
mäthure vidyamäne 'pi
saàsåtià bhajate sadä
ahaù-Oh; lokaù-world; mahän-great; andhaù-blind; netra-yuktaù-with eyes; na-do not; paçyati'see;

mäthure-in Mathurä; vidyamäne-being; api-even; saàsåtim-to birth and death» bhajate-attached; sadä-
always.
The people of this world, although they have eyes, are blind and cannot see. Although Mathurä is
manifest in this world, they remain attached to this world of repeated birth and death.
Text 57
mänuñéà yonim atuläà

labdhvä bhägyasya yogataù
våthaiväyur gataà teñäà
na dåñövä mathuräà purém
mänuñém-human; yonim-birth; atuläm-rare; labdhvä-having attained; bhägyasya yogataù-

possessing; våthä-useless; eva-indeed; äyur-life; gatam-gone; teñäm-of them; na-not; dåñövä-having
seen; mathuräm- purém-Mathurä.
If, after attaining this rare and valuable human form of life, one does not see Mathurä, then he
wastes his life.
Text 58
aho mateù sudaurbalyam

aho bhägyasya daurvidham
aho mohasya mahimä
mathurä naiva sevyate
ahaù-Oh; mateù-of intelligence; sudaurbalyam-great weakness; ahaù-Oh; bhägyasya-of good-

fortune; daurvidham-collapse; ahaù-Oh; mohasya-of illusion; mahimä-glory; mathurä-Mathurä; na-not;
eva-indeed; sevyate-is served.
O what foolishness! What misfortune! What illusion when Mathurä is not served.
Text 59
säpadaà sampadaà jïätvä

säpäyaà käyaà uccakaiù
capaläà caïcaläà caiva
dåñövä mat-puram äçrayet
sa-with; äpadam-calamity; sampadam-prosperity; jïätvä-knowing; sa-äpäyam-with death; käyam-the

body; uccakaiù-very; capaläm-fickle; caïcaläm-the goddess of fortune; ca-and; eva-indeed; dåñövä-
having seen; mat-puram'My city; äçrayet-should take shelter.
Knowing that prosperity contains calamity within it, and knowing that this body contains death
within it, and seeing that the goddess of fortune is fickle, one should take shelter of My city of
Mathurä.
Texts 60-62
tatraiva bhavatäà bandhuù

päëòavänäà suhåt sakhä
sätvatänäà priyaù säkñäd
yädavänäà kuleçvaraù
kåñëaù kamala-paträkñaù
so 'vatérëo yudhiñöhira
rämeëa saha devakyäà
vasudeva-gåhottame
tasya karmäny anekäni

parigétäni süribhiù
jätäni mäthure deçe täà puréà ko na sevate
skände mathura-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; bhavatäm-

of you; bandhuù-friend; päëòavänäm-of the Pandavas; suhåt sakhä-friend; sätvatänäm-of the Satvatas;
priyaù-dear; säkñäd-directly; yädavänäm-of the Yadavas; kuleçvaraù-leader of the family; kåñëaù-
Kåñëa; kamala-paträkñaù-lotus-eyed; saù-He; avatérëaù-descended; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhisthira;
rämeëa-with Balaräma; saha-with; devakyäm-in the womâ of Devaké; vasudeva-gåha-uttame-in
Vasudeva's house; tasya-of Him; karmäni-deeds; anekäni-many; parigétäni-glorified; süribhiù-by the
devotees; jätäni-born; mäthure deçe-in Mathurä; täm- purém-this city; kaù-who?; na-not; sevate-serves.
O Yudhiñöhira, who will not serve this city of Mathurä, where lotus-eyed Kåñëa, who appeared
with Balaräma in the womb of Devaké in the palace of Vasudeva, and whose activities are glorified by
the demigods, and who is the friend of all you Päëòavas, and who is dear to all the Sätvatas, and who is
the king of all the Yadus, decsended?
Text 63
ata evädi-värähe
mathuräà ca parityajya
yo 'nyatra kurute ratim
müòho bhramati saàsäre
mohito mama mäyayä
ataù eva-therefore; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mathuräm-Mathurä; ca-and; parityajya-

abandoning; yaù-who; anyatra-in another place; kurute-does; ratim-attraction; müòhaù-bewildered;
bhramati-wanders; saàsäre-in birth and death; mohitaù-bewildered; mama-My; mäyayä-by the maya.
In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa is is said:
One who leaves Mathurä and is happy in to stay in some other place is a fool who, bewildered by
My mäyä, wanders in this world of birth and death.
Text 64
mathuräà ca parityajya
yo 'nyatra kurute spåhäm
durbuddhes tasya kià jïänam
ajïänena vimohitaù
skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; mathura-khaëòe-Mathura'-khaëòa; mathuräm-Mathurä; ca-and;

parityajya-leaving; yaù-who; anyatra-some other place; kurute-does; spåhäm-desire; durbuddheù-fool;
tasya-of him; kim-what?; jïänam-knowledge; ajïänena-by ignorance; vimohitaù-bewildered.
He who, although having attained Mathurä, desires to go somewhere else, is bewildered. What
knowledge does he have? He is bewildered by ignorance.
Text 65
athägati-gatitvam. ädi-värähe
mäträ piträ parityaktä

ye tyaktä nija-bandhubhiù
yeñäà kväpi gatir nästi
teñäà madhu-puré gatiù
atha-now; agati-of they who have no shelter; gatitvam-the state of being the shelter; ädi-värähe-in
the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mäträ-by mother; piträ-and father;û parityaktäh-abandoned; ye-who; tyaktä-
abandoned; nija-bandhubhiù-by their own relatives; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere; gatir-shelter;
na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.
Mathurä Is the Shelter of the Shelterless
For they who are abandoned by mother, father, friends and relatives, and who have no shelter,
Mathurä is a shelter.
Text 66
päpa-räçibhir äkräntä
ye däridrya-paräjitäù
päpa-of sins; räçibhir-by hosts; äkräntäh-overpowered; ye-who; däridrya-by poverty; paräjitäù-

defeated; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere;û gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-
puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.
For they who are overpowered by a host of sins, and who are defeated by poverty and who have no
shelter, Mathura' is a shelter.
Text 67
ye ca yoga-paribhrañöä
ye tapo-däna-varjitäù
ye-who; ca-and; yoga-paribhrañöä-fallen from yoga; ye-who; tapaù-austerity; däna-and charity;

varjitäù-without; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere;û gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them;
madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.
For they who have fallen from the path of yoga, who have neither austerity nor charity, and who
have no shelter, Mathura' is a shelter.
Text 68
çruti-småti-vihénä ye
çaucäcära-vivarjitäù
çruti-småti-vihénä ye-who; çauca-äcära-vivarjitäù-without cleanliness; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-

somewhere;û gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.
For they who have no knowledge of çruti or småti, who have no purity, and have no shelter,
Mathurä is a shelter.
Text 69
särät särataraà sthänaà

guhyänäà guhyam uttamam
gatim anveñamänänäà
mäthure paramä gatiù
särät-than the best; särataram-better; sthänam-place; guhyänäm-of secrets; guhyam-secret; uttamam-

ultimate; gatim-destination; anvesamänänäm-of they who seek; mäthure-in Mathurä; paramä'supreme;
gatiù-shelter.
The ultimate, the supereme secret of all secrets, the goal for they who seek it, Mathura' is the
supreme shelter.
Text 70
pade pade samäkräntä

ye vipadbhir ahar-niçam
pade pade-at every step; samäkräntäh-defeated; ye-who; vipadbhir-by calamities; ahar-niçam-day

and night; yeñäm-of whom; kväpi-somewhere;û gatir-shelter; na-not; asti-is; teñäm-of them; madhu-
puré-Mathurä; gatiù-is the shelter.
For they who, at every step, day and night, are defeated by a host of calamities, and who have no
shelter, Mathura' is a shelter.
Text 71
atha nitya-hari-sannidhänatvam.
ädi-värähe mathuräyäù paraà kñetraà

trailokye näpi vartate
yasmäd vasämy ahaà devi
mathuräyäà tu sarvadä
atha-now; nitya-eternally; hari-of Lord Kåñëa; sannidhänatvam-nearness; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-

varäha Puräëa; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; param-supreme; kñetram-place; trailokye-in the three worlds;
na-not; api-even; vartate-is; yasmäd-because; vasämi-reside; aham-I; devi-O goddess; mathuräyäm-in
Mathurä; tu-indeed; sarvadä-eternally.
Lord Hari Stays Eternally In Mathurä
O goddess, because no place in the three worlds is superior to Mathurä, I eternally stay in Mathurä.
Text 72
aho 'ti-dhanyä mathurä

yatra sannihito hariù
sarveñäà yatra päpänäà
praveço na hi vidyate
ahaù-Oh; ati-dhanyä-supremely opulent; mathurä-Mathurä; yatra-where; sannihitaù-stays;
hariù'Kåñëa; sarveñäm-of all; yatra-where; päpänäm-sins; praveçaù-entance; na-not; hi-indeed;
vidyate-is.
Mathurä, where Lord Hari stayed, and where no sin can enter, is supremely opulent
Text 73
aho madhu-puré dhanyä

yatra tiñöhati kaàsahä
tatra deva-muniù sarvo
väsam icchati sarvadä
pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; ahaù-Oh; madhu-puré-Mathurä; dhanyä-

opulent; yatra-where; tiñöhati'stays; kaàsahä-Kåñëa; tatra-there; deva-demigods; muniù-sages; sarvaù-
all; väsam-residence; icchati'desire; sarvadä-eternally.
In opulent Mathurä, where Lord Kåñëa stays, all the demigods and sages aspire to live eternally.
Text 74
çré-bhägavate prathamä-skände
aho alaà çläghyatamaà yadoù kulaà

aho alaà çläghyatamaà madhor vanam
yad eña puàsäm åñabhaù priyaù çréyaù
sva-janmanä caìkramanena caïcati
çré-bhägavate prathamä-skände-in Srimad-Bhagavatam, Canto One; ahaù-oh; alam-greatly;

çläghyatamam-glorified; yadoù-of King Yadu; kulam-the dynasty; ahaù-oh; alam-greatly;
çläghyatamam-glorified; madhor vanam-Mathurä; yad-which; eñah-He; puàsäm-of living beings;
åñabhaù'the supreme leader; priyaù-the husband; çréyaù-of the goddess of fortune; sva-janmanä-by His
birth; caìkramanena caïcati-wandered.
In Çrémad-Bhägavatam 1.10.26 it is said:
Oh, how supremely glorified is the dynasty of King Yadu, and how virtuous is the land of Mathurä,
where the supreme leader all living beings, the husband of the goddess of fortune, has taken His birth
and wandered in His childhood.*
Text 75
caturtha-skände
tat täta gaccha bhadraà te

yamunäyäs taöaà çucim
puëyaà madhuvanaà yatra
sännidhyaà nityadä hareù
caturtha-skände-in the Fourth Canto; tat-that; täta-my dear son; gaccha-go; bhadraàgood fortune; te-
for you; yamunäyäù-of the Yamunä; taöam-bank; çucim-being purified; puëyam-the holy;
madhuvanam-of the name Madhuvana; yatra-where; sännidhyaàbeing nearer; nityadä-always; hareù-of
the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
My dear boy, I therefore wish all good fortune to you. You should go to the bank of the Yamunä,
where there is a virtuous forest named Madhuvana, and there be purified. Just by going there one draws
nearer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who always lives there.*
Text 76
çré-daçame
räjadhäné tataù säbhüt

sarva-yädava-bhü-bhujäm
mathurä bhagavän yatra
nityaà sannihito hariù
çré-daçame-in the Tenth Canto; räjadhäné-the capitol; tataù-from that time; sä-the country and the
city known as Mathurä; abhüt-became; sarva-yädava-bhü-bhujäm-of all the kings who appeared in the
Yadu dynasty; mathurä-the place known as Mathurä; bhagavän-the Supreme Personality of Godhead;
yatra-wherein; nityam-eternally; sannihitaù-intimately connected, living eternally; hariù-the Lord, the
Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Since that time, the city of Mathura' had been the capitol of all the kings of the Yadu dynasty. The
city and district of Mathura' are very intimately connected with Kåñëa, for Lord Kåñëa lives there
eternally.*
Text 77
çré-viñëu-puräëe prathame 'àçe
hatvä ca lavaëaà rakño-

madhu-putraà mahä-balam
çatrughno mathuräà näma
puréà tatra cakära vai
çré-viñëu-puräëe-in Viñëu Puräëa; prathame aàçe-First Canto; hatvä-having killed; ca-and;

lavaëam-Lavaëa; rakño madhu-putram-the son of the demon Madhu; mahä-balam-powerful;
çatrughnaù-Çatrughna; mathuräm-Mathurä;û näma-named; purém-city; tatra-there; cakära-did; vai-
indeed.
In the Viñëu Puräëa, First Canto, it is said:
This city is named Mathura' because Çatrughna here killed powerful Lavaëäsura, the son of the
rakñasa Madhu.
Text 78
yatra vai deva-devasya

sännidhyaà hari-medhasaù
sarva-päpa-hare tasmiàs
tapas térthe cakära saù
yatra-where; vai-indeed; deva-devasya-the master of the demigods; sännidhyam-nearness; hari-
medhasaù-they who have fixed their hearts on Lord Hari; sarva-päpa-all sins;hare-removing; tasmin-
there; tapaù-austerities; térthe'at the holy place; cakära-did; saù-he.
He (Dhruva Mahäräja, performed austerities at this holy place, where all sins are destroyed, and
where the the Supreme Personality of Godhead, on whom the devotees fix their hearts, always stays.
Text 79
väyu-puräëe catvariàçad yojanänäà

tatas tu mathurä småtä
yatra devo hariù säkñät
svayaà tiñöhati sarvadä
väyu-puräëe-in the Vayu Puräëa; catvariàçad-40; yojanänäm-yojanas; tataù-then; tu-indeed;

mathurä-Mathurä; småtäù-remembered; yatra-where; devaù-Lord; hariù-Kåñëa; säkñät-directly;
svayam-personally; tiñöhati-stays; sarvadä-eternally.
In the Väyu Puräëa it is said:
In Mathurä, which is 40 yojanas (320 miles) in measurement, Lord Hari stays eternally.
Text 80
atha çré-bhagavat-kåpä-labhyatvam. ädi-värähe
na tat-puëyair na taj-jïänair
na tapobhir na taj-japaiù
na labhyaà vividhair yajïair
labhyaà mad-anubhävataù
atha-now; çré-bhagavat-of the Lord; kåpä-of the mercy; labhyatvam-attainment; ädi-värähe-in the
Ädi-varäha Puräëa; na-not; tat-puëyair-with piety; na-not; taê-jïänair-by knowledge; na-not; tapobhir-
by austerities; na-not; taê-japaiù-by japa» na-not; labhyam-attainable; vividhair-by various; yajïair-
sacrifices; labhyam-attainable; mad-anubhävataù-by My mercy.
In Mathura' One May Attain the Mercy of the the Supreme Personality of Godhead
Not by great expertise, not by transcendental knowledge, not by austerities, not by chanting mantras
and not by performing many yajïas, but only by my mercy is Mathurä attained.
Text 81
çré-viñëoù kåpayä nünaà
tatra väso bhaviñyati
vinä viñëoù prasädena
kñaëam ekaà na tiñöhati
çré-viñëoù-of Lord Viñëu; kåpayä-by the mercy; nünam-indeed; tatra-there; väsaù-residence;

bhaviñyati-will be; vinä-without; viñëoù-of Viñëu; prasädena-by the mercy; kñaëam-moment; ekam-
one; na-not; tiñöhati-stays.
By the mercy of Çré Viñëu one attains residence in Mathura'. Without Viñëu's mercy one cannot
stay for even moment in Mathurä.
Text 82
pädme uttara-khaëòe
harau yeñäà sthirä bhaktir
bhüyasé yeñu tat-kåpä
teñäm eva hi dhanyänäà
mathuräyäà bhaved ratiù
pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; uttara-khaëòe-Uttara-khaëòa; harau-to Lord Hari; yeñäm-of whom;
sthirä-steady; bhaktir-devotion; bhüyasé-great; yeñu'in whom; tat-kåpä-His mercy; teñäm-of them; eva-
indeed; hi-indeed; dhanyänäm-fortunate; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; bhaved'is; ratiù-pleasure.
In the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:
The fortunate souls who have firm devotion for Lord Hari, and who have attained His great mercy,
take pleasure in Mathurä.
Text 83
atha bhagavad-dhyänädi-labhyatvam. ädi-värähe
yadä viçuddhas tapa-ädinä janäù

çubhäçrayä dhyäna-dhana nirantaram
tadaiva paçyanti mamottamäà puréà
na canyathä kalpa-çatair dvijottama
atha-now; bhagavad-on the Lord; dhyäna-meditation; ädi-beginning with; labhyatvam-attainable;

ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; yadä'when; viçuddhaù-pure; tapah-austerity; ädinä-beginning
with; janäù-people; çubha-pure; çrayäh-hearts; dhyäna-dhana-wealthy with meditation; nirantaram-
always; tadä-then; eva-indeed; paçyanti-see; mama-My; uttamäm-supreme; purém-city; na-not; ca-and;
anyathä-otherwise; kalpa-çatair-with hundreds of kalpas; dvijottama-O best of the dvijas.
Mathura' Can Be Attained By One Who Meditates on the Supreme Personality of Godhead
In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is saidL:
O best of the brähmaëas, living entities who are purified by austerity and other spiritual practices,
who hearts are filled with auspicious things, and who are fixed in constant meditation on Me, are able
to see my supreme city of Mathura'. Others cannot see it in millions of kalpas.
Text 84
mokña-pradatvam. ädi-värähe
yä gatir yoga-yuktasya
brahmajïasya manéñinaù
sä gatis tyajataù präëän
mathuräyäà narasya ca
mokña-liberation; pradatvam-granting; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; yä-which; gatir-

destination; yoga-yuktasya-of one engaged in yoga; brahmajïasya-who knows brahman; manéñinaù-
wise; sä-that; gatiù-destination; tyajataù-giving up; präëän-life; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; narasya-of a
person; ca-and.
Mathurä Grants Liberation
The spiritual desintation attained by one who practices yoga, one who knows Brahman, or one who
is a thoughtful philosospher, is also attained by a person who passes from this life in Mathurä.
Text 85
térthe caiva gåhe väpi

catvare pathi caiva hi
yatra tatra måtä devi
muktià yänti na cänyathä
térthe-at this holy place; ca-and; eva-indeed; gåhe-at home; vä-or; api-and; catvare-in a courtyard;
pathi-on the road; ca-and; eva-indeed; hi-indeed; yatra-where; tatra-there; måtäù-after death; devi-O
goddess; muktim-liberation; yänti-attain; na-not; ca-and; anyathä-otherwise.
O goddess, they who die in this holy place in a home here, in a courtyard, or on the road, attain
liberation without any doubt.
Text 86
käçy-ädi-puryo yadi santi loke

täsäà tu madhye mathuraiva dhanyä
yä janma-mauïjé-vrata-måtyu-dähair
nåëäà caturdhä vidadhäti mokñam
käçy-ädi-puryaù-beginning with Väräëasé; yadi-if; santi-are; loke-in the world; täsäm-of them; tu-
indeed; madhye-in the midst; mathurä-Mathurä; eva-indeed; dhanyä-opulent; yä-which; janma-birth;
mauïjé-vrata-brahminical initiation; måtyu-of death; dähair-by the fires; nåëäm-of people; caturdhä-in
four» vidadhäti-grants; mokñam-liberation.
If Väräëasé and other holy cities were assemnbled together on this earth Mathurä would be the
greatest and most opulent amongst them. With the fires of birth, death, or brahmnical initiation within
its boundaries, Mathura' grants the four kinds of liberation.
Text 87
na yogair yä gatir labhyä

manvantara-çatair api
anyatra helayä sätra
labhayte mat-prasädataù
na-not; yogair-by yoga; yä-which; gatir-destination; labhyä-is attained; manvantara-çatair-in

hundreds of Manvantaras; api-even; anyatra-in another place; helayä-easily; sä-that; atra-here;
labhayte-is attained; mat-prasädataù-by My mercy.
The spiritual destination that in another place cannot be attained by the practicing yoga for
thousands of manvantaras is attainable by My mercy very easily in this place.
Text 88
na päpebhyo bhayaà yatra

na bhayaà yatra vai yamät
na garbha-väsa-bhér yatra
tat kñetraà ko na saàçrayet
na-not; päpebhyaù-of sins; bhayam-fear; yatra-where; na-not; bhayam-fear; yatra-where; vai'indeed;

yamät-of yama; na-not; garbha-väsa-of residence in a mother's womb; bhér-fear; yatra-where; tat
kñetram-that place; kaù-who?; na-not; saàçrayet-will take shelter.
Who will not take shelter of this holy place where there is no fear of sin, no fear of Yamaräja, and
no fear of residing again in a mother's womb.
Text 89
vinä saìkhyena yogena

vinä svätma-vicintanam
vinä vrata-tapo-dänaiù
çreyo vai präëinäm iha
vinä-without; saìkhyena-sankhya; yogena-yoga; vinä-without; svätma-vicintanam-meditation on the

Self; vinä-without; vrata-vows; tapaù-austerities; dänaiù-and charity; çreyaù-benediction; vai-indeed;
präëinäm-of the,living entities; iha-here.
Withyout saìkhya, without yoga, without meditation on the Self, and without vows, austerities or
charity, the living entities here attain the greatest benediction.
Text 90
kåmi-kéöa-pataìgädya
mathuräyäà måta hi ye
külät patanti ye våkñäs
te 'pi yänti paräà gatim
kåmi-worms; kéöa-insects; pataìga-birds; ädya-beginning with; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; måta hi-

indeed; ye-who; külät-from the riverbanks; patanti'fall; ye-who; våkñäùtrees; te-they; api-even; yänti-
attain; paräm- gatim-the supreme destination.
The worms, insects, birds, and other creatures who die here and the trees that fall down from the
riverbanks here, all attain the supreme destination.
Text 91
värähe
viàça-yojana-vistäro
mathuräyäç ca maëòalam
yatra präëän vimuïcanti
siddhä yänti paräà gatim
värähe-in the varäha Puräëa; viàça-yojana-vistäraù-20 yojanas in size; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; ca-
and; maëòalam'circle; yatra-where; präëän-life; vimuïcanti-abandon; siddhäh-perfect; yänti-attain;
paräm- gatim-the supreme destination.
They who die in the twenty-yojana (160 miles, area of Mathura' become perfect and attain the
supreme destination.
Text 92
caëòäla-jaòa-mükänäà
jéva-hiàsä-ratasya ca
mathurä-piëòa-dänena
punar janma na vidyate
pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; pätäla-khaëòe-Patala-khaëòa; caëòäla-outcaste; jaòa-fool; mükänäm-
deaf-mute; jéva-hiàsä-ratasya-sadist; ca-and; mathurä-in Mathurä; piëòa-dänena-by offering piëòa;
punar-again; janma-birth; na-not; vidyate-is.
There is no next birth for an outcaste, a fool, a deaf-mute, or a sadist, that offers piëòa in Mathurä.
Text 93
praëälyäm iñöa-khacite
çmaçäne vyomni maïcake
aööäle vä måto devi
mäthure muktim äpnuyuù
praëälyäm-in a ditch; iñöa-khacite-ina brick-house; çmaçäne-at a crematorium; vyomni-in the sky;

maïcake'on a throne; aööäle-in a palace; vä-or; måtaù-dying; devi-O goddess; mäthure-in Mathurä;
muktim-liberation; äpnuyuù-attain.
Dying in Mathurä, whether in a ditch, in a brick-house, at a crematorium, in the sky, on a throne, or

in a palace, one attains liberation.
Text 94-95
vämana-puräëe
mathurä-tértham atulaà
viçrutaà loka-sat-kåtam
yatra kåñëas tu gopälaiù
samaà kréòitavan jale
tatra gatvä naro brahman

tri-rätram uñitas tatra
nirähäro jitendriyaù
viharantaà jale kåñëaà
dhyäyan mukto bhaven naraù
vämana-puräëe-in the Vämana Puräëa; mathurä-tértham-Mathurä; atulam-peerless; viçrutam-

famous; loka-sat-kåtam-honored in the world; yatra-where; kåñëaù-Kåñëa; tu-indeed; gopälaiù-the
gopas; samam-with; kréòitavan-played; jale-in the water; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; naraù-a
person; brahman-O brähmaëa; mucyate-is freed; sarva-pätakaiù-from all sins; tri-rätram-for three
nights; uñitaù-residing; tatra-there; nirähäraù-fasting; jitendriyaù-controlling the senses; viharantam-
playing; jale-in the water; kåñëam-on Lord Kåñëa; dhyäyan-meditating; muktaù-liberated; bhavet-
becomes; naraù-a person.
In the Vämana Puräëa it is said:
A person who goes to peerless, famous, honored-in-all-the-worlds Mathurä-tértha, where Kåñëa

played in the water with the gopas, becomes free from all sins, O brähmaëa. A person who, fasting,
controlling his senses, and meditating on Kåñëa playing in the water, stays there for three nights,
becomes liberated.
Text 96
saura-puräëe
astéha mathurä näma

tréñu lokeñu viçrutä
kåñëa-päda-rajo-miçra-
bälukäpüta-véthikä
sparçanena naras tasya
mucyate sarva-bandhanät
saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; asti-is; iha-here; mathurä-Mathurä; näma-named; tréñu lokeñu-in
the three worlds; viçrutä-famous; kåñëa-of Kåñëa; päda-of the feet; rajaù-with the dust; miçra-mixed;
bälukäpüta-véthikä-purified pathways; sparçanena-by the touch; naraù-a person; tasya-of that;
mucyate-is liberated; sarva-bandhanät-from all bonds.
In the Çaura Purän„a it is said:
Here is the place named Mathurä, famous in the three worlds, and its pathways purified by dust
mixed with the dust of Kåñëa's feet. By its touch a person becomes liberated from all bondage.
Text 97
mathurä-khaëòe
mathuräyäà vasiñyämi
yasyämi mathurä-purém
iti yasya bhaved buddhiù
so 'pi bandhäd vimucyate
mathurä-khaëòe-in the Mathura'-khaëòa; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vasiñyämi-I will live; yasyämi-I

will go; mathurä-purém-to Mathurä; iti-thus; yasya-of whom; bhaved-may be; buddhiù-conception; saù
api-he; bandhäd-from bondage; vimucyate-is liberated.
In the Mathurä-khaëòa it is said:
I will live in Mathurä. I will go to Mathurä. A person who thinks in this way becomes free from
material bondage.
Text 98
atha viñëu-loka-pradatvam. brahmäëòe
ye paçyanty acyutaà devaà

mäthure devaké-sutam
te viñëu-lokam äsädya
na cyavante kadäcana
atha-now; viñëu-loka-Viñëuloka; pradatvam-giving; brahmäëòe-in the Brahmäëòa Puräëa; ye-who;

paçyanti-see; acyutam-Lord Acyuta; devam-Lord; mäthure-in Mathurä; devaké-sutam-the son of
Devaké; te-they; viñëu-lokam-Viñëuloka; äsädya'attaining; na-not; cyavante-fall down; kadäcana-ever.
Mathurä Grants Residence in Viñëuloka
In the Brahmäëòa Puräëa it is said:
They who in Mathurä see the Deity of Devaké's son, the spog who never falls down, attain
Viñëuloka and never fall down.
Text 99
yäträà karoti kåñëasya

çraddhayä yaù samähitaù
sarva-päpair vinirmukto
viñëulokaà sa gacchati
yäträm-journey; karoti-does; kåñëasya-in Kåñëa; çraddhayä-with faith; yaù-who;

samähitaù'assembled; sarva-päpair-from all sins; vinirmuktaù-free; viñëulokam-to Viñëuloka; sah-he;
gacchati-goes.
A person who, filled with faith in Lord Kåñëa, goes on a journey there, becomes free from all sins
and goes to Viñëuloka.
Text 100
mükä jaòändha-vadhiräs
tapo-niyama-varjitäù
kälenaiva måtä ye ca
gacchanti viñëu-mandiram
mükäh-dumb; jaòa-foolish; andha-blind; vadhiräùand deaf; tapo-niyama-varjitäù-without austerity;
kälena-in time; eva-indeed; måtäù-after death; ye-who; ca-and; gacchanti-go;û viñëu-mandiram-the
palace of Lord Viñëu.
The deaf, dumb, blind, foolish, and they who hasve no austerity or sense-control, who in the course
of time die in Mathurä, go to Lord Viñëu's palace.
Text 101
sarpa-dañöäù paçu-hatäù
pävakämbu-vinäçitäù
labdhäpa-måtyavo ye ca
mäthure hari-loka-gäù
sarpa-by a snake; dañöäù-bitten; paçu-by a wild beast; hatäù-killed; pävaka-by fire; ambu-or water;
vinäçitäù-killed; labdhäpa-måtyavaù-who die; ye-who; ca-and; mäthure-in Mathurä; hari-loka-to Lord
Hari's planet; gäù-go.
They who, bitten by a snake, killed by a wild beast, consumed by flames, or drowned in water, die
in Mathurä, attain the planet of Lord Hari.
Text 102
ädi-värähe
kalpa-grämeëa kià tasya

väräëasyä ca vä çubhe
mathuräyäà tu yat puëyaà
tasya puëya-phalaà çåëu
ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; kalpa-grämeëa-for many kalpas; kim-what is the use?; tasya-of
that; väräëasyäh-at varanasi; ca-and; vä'or; çubhe-O beautiful one; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed;
yat-that; puëyam-piety; tasya-of that; puëya-phalam-pious result; çåëu
"What is the use of living for many kalpas at Väräëasé, O beautiful one, when the same pious result
is easily attained at Mathurä? Listen, and I will tell you of that pious result.
Text 103
mathuräà ca samäsädyä yaù kaçcid måyate bhuvi

api kéöaù pataìgo vä
jäyate sa caturbhujaù
mathuräm-Mathurä; ca-and; samäsädya-attaining; yaù kaçcid-someone; måyate-dies; bhuvi-in this

world; api-even; kéöaù'a worm or a bug; pataìgaù-a moth or a bird; vä-or; jäyate-is born; sah-he;
caturbhujaù-with four arms.
A human, worm, insect, moth, or bird who goes to Mathura' and dies there, becomes reborn as a
four-armed resident of the spiritual world.
Text 104
gautaméya-tantre
mathnäti sarva-päpäni
dadäti paramäà gatim
uttamo hi naro yatra
tena sä mathurä småtä
gautaméya-tantre-in the gautaméya Tantra; mathnäti-crushes; sarva-all; päpäni-sins; dadäti'gives;

paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination; uttamaù-ultimate; hi-indeed; naraù-a person; yatra-where;
tena-by him; sä-this; mathurä-Mathurä; småtä-remembered.
In the Gautaméya-tantra it is said:
The place that crushes (math, all sins and grants the supreme destination where the Supreme Person
resides, is known as Mathurä.
Text 105
sarväbhiñöa-pradatvam. brahmäëòa-puräëe
satyaà satyaà muni-çreñöha

brüve çapatha-pürvakam
sarväbhiñöa-pradaà nänyan
mathuräyäù samaà kvacit
sarva-all; abhiñöa-desires; pradatvam-giving; brahmäëòa-puräëe-in the brahmäëòa Puräëa; satyam-

true; satyam-true; muni-sages;çreñöha-best; brüve-I say; çapatha-pürvakam-with a vow; sarva-all;
abhiñöa-desires;pradam-giving; na-not; anyat-another; mathuräyäù-to Mathurä; samam-equal; kvacit-
anywhere.
Mathura' Fulfills All Desireñ

It is true! It is true! O sage, I vow that it is true! No other place fulfills all desires as Mathura' does!
Text 106
skände mathurä-khaëòe
kñetra-pälo mahä-devo
vartate yatra sarvadä
yatra viçränti-térthaà ca
tatra kià durlabhaà phalam
skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; kñetra-pälaù-protector; mahä-

devaù-Mahädeva; vartate-is; yatra-where; sarvadä-always; yatra-where; viçränti-tértham-Viçränti-
tértha; ca-and; tatra-there; kim-what?; durlabham-difficult to attain; phalam-result.
In Mathurä, where the Supreme Lord is the all-pervading protector, and where there are places of
His transcendental pastimes, what result is difficult to attain?
Text 107
padmottara-khaëòe
tri-varga-dä käminäà yä
mumukñüëäà ca mokñadä
bhaktécchor bhaktidä kas taà
mathuräà näçrayed budhaù
padmottara-khaëòe-in Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; tri-varga-dä-giving the three goals; käminäm-

of they who desire; yä-which; mumukñüëäm-of they who wish liberation; ca-and; mokñadä-giver of
liberation; bhakti-icchor-of one who desires bhakti; bhaktidä-giver of bhakti; kaù-who?; tam-this;
mathuräm-Mathurä; na-not; äçrayed-takes shelter; budhaù-wise.
In the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:
What wise man would not take shelter of of Mathurä, which gives the three goals of life to they who
desire them, which gives liberation to they who hanker after liberation, and which gives devotional
service to they who desire devotional service?
Text 108
tatraiva pätäla-khaëòe pärvaté-praçnaù
uktodbhütaç ca mahimä
mathuräyä jaöädhara
muner bhuvo vä saritaù
prabhavaù kena vä vibho
kåñëasya vä prabhävo 'yaà
samyogasya pratäpavän
tatra-there;iva-like; pätäla-khaëòe-in thre Patala-khaëòa; pärvaté-praçnaù-Parvati's question; ukta-

said; udbhütaù-manifested; ca-and; mahimä-glory; mathuräyä-of Mathurä; jaöädhara-O Çiva; muner-of
the sage; bhuvaù-of the world; vä-or; saritaù-of the rivers; prabhavaù-glory; kena-by what?; vä-or;
vibhaù-O Lord; kåñëasya-of Kåñëa; vä-or; prabhävaù-glory; ayam-this; samyogasya-contact;
pratäpavän-powerful.
In the Padma Puräëa, Pätäla-khaëòa, Pärvaté asks the following question:
O Jaöädhara, You have already described the glory of Mathurä. What is the glory of the sages, the
ground, and the rivers there? What is the great glory of Kåñëa there?
Text 109
tatraiva çré-mahädevottaram
na bhümika-prabhävaç ca
sarito vä varänane
åñinäà na prabhävaç ca
prabhävo viñëu-tärake
tatra-there; eva-indeed; çré-mahädeva-Lord Mahädeva's uttaram-reply; na-not; bhümika-of ground;

prabhävaù-glory; ca-and; saritaù-of rivers; vä-or; varänane-O girl with the beautiful face; åñinäm-of
sages; na-not; prabhävaù-glory; ca-and; prabhävaù-glory; viñëu-tärake-of Lord Viñëu's täraka potency.
Çré Mahädeva replied:
O girl with a beautiful face, this is not the glory of ordinary ground, rivers, and sages. This is the
glory of Lord Viñëu's täraka potency.
Text 110
tathä päraka-cic-chakter
ubhe tat-pada-kärake
tad eva çåëu bho devi
prabhävo yena vartate
tathä-so; päraka-cé-chakter-from the päraka potency; ubhe-both; tat-pada-kärake-cause; tad-this;

eva-indeed; çåëu-hear; bhaù-O; devi-O goddess; prabhävaù-glory; yena-how;û vartate-is.
The glory here is also manifest from the spiritual päraka potency. O goddess, please hear of these
two potencies.
Text 111
çré-kåñëa-mahimä sarvas
cic-chakter yaù pravartate
tärakaà pärakaà tasya
prabhävo 'yam anähataù
tarakäê jäyate muktiù
prema-bhaktiç ca pärakaö
çré-kåñëa-of Kåñëa; mahimä-glory; sarvaùall; cé-chakter-spiritual potency; yaù-who; pravartate-is;

tärakam-täraka; pärakam-päraka; tasya-of that; prabhävaù-glory; ayam-this; anähataù-glorious; tarakäj-
from täraka; jäyate-is born; muktiù-liberation; prema-bhaktiù-pure devotional service; ca-and; pärakaö-
from päraka.
All Kåñëa's glories are manifest from His spiritual potency. His glories are His täraka potency and
His päraka potency. From His täraka potency liberation is manifest. From His päraka potency loöing
devotional service is manifest.
Text 112
tatraiva çré-bhagavad-väkyam
ubhau manträö ubhe nämni

madéya-präëa-vallabhe
nänä-nämäni manträç ca
tan-madhye säram ucyate
tatra-there;iva çré-bhagavad-of the Lord; väkyam-words; ubhau-both; manträv-mantras; ubhe-âoth;

nämni-names; madéya-My; präëa-life; vallabhe-dear; nänä-various; nämäni-names; manträù-mantras;
ca-and; tan-madhye'in the midst; säram-best; ucyate-is said.
There also the Supreme Lord says:
O girl more dear to me than life, in this way there are two mantras and two names. Among all
mantras and names they are said to be the best.
Text 113
ajïätam athava jïätaà

tärakaà japate yadi
yatra tatra bhaven måtyuù
käçyäà tu phalam ädiçet
ajïätam-not known; athavä-or; jïätam-known; tärakam-täraka; japate-chants; yadi'if; yatra-where;
tatra-there; bhavet-is; måtyuù-death; käçyäm-in Väräëasé; tu-indeed; phalam'result; ädiçet-shows.
If a person knowingly or unkowingly chants the täraka mantra, then no matter where he dies, he
attains the result of dying in Väräëasé.
Text 114
vartate yasya jihvägre

sa pumäl loka-pävanaù
chinatti sarva-päpäni
käçé-väsa-phalaà labhet
vartate-is; yasya-of whom; jihvägre-on the tip of the tongue; sah-he; pumän-person; loka-pävanaù-
purifying the world; chinatti-cuts; sarva-all; päpäni-sins; käçé-in Väräëasé; väsa-residence; phalam-
result; labhet-attains.
He on whose tongue the name täraka appears, purifies the people of the worlds. He breaks all sins.
He attains the result of living at Väräëasé.
Text 115
iti täraka-mantro 'yaà

yas tu käçyäà pravartate
sa eva mäthure devi
vartate 'tra varänane
iti-thus; täraka-mantro ayam-this täraka mantra; yaù-who; tu-indeed; käçyäm-in Väräëasé;

pravartate'is; sah-he; eva-indeed; mäthure-in Mathurä; devi-O goddess; vartate-is; atra-here; varänane-
O girl with the beautiful face.
O goddess, O girl with the beautiful face, even though he lives in Väräëasé, a person who chants
this täraka mantra actually lives here in Mathurä.
Text 116
atha pärakaà ucyeta

yathä-mantraà yathä-balam
pärakaà yatra varteta
åddhi-siddhi-samägamaù
atha-now; pärakam-päraka; ucyeta-is said; yathä-as; mantram-mantra; yathä-balam-as far as there is

power; pärakam-päraka; yatra-where; varteta-is; åddhi-siddhi-samägamaù-powers and opulences.
When the powerful päraka mantra is chanted, spiritual opulences and perfections appear.
Text 117
püjyo bhavati trailokye

çatäyur jäyate pumän
añöa-siddhi-samäyukto
vartate yatra pärakam
püjyaù-worshiped; bhavati-is; trailokye-in the three worlds; çatäyur-a life of 100 years; jäyate-is
âorn; pumän'person; añöa-siddhi-samäyuktaù-with the 8 mysté powers; vartate-is; yatra-where;
pärakam-päraka.
A person who chants the päraka mantra becomes worshiped by the three worlds. He lives for a
hundred years. He attains the eight perfections.
Text 118
pärakaà yasya jihvägre

tasya santoña-vartitä
paripürëo bhavet kämaù
satya-saìkalpatä tathä
pärakam-päraka; yasya-of whom; jihvägre-on the tongue; tasya-of him; santoña-vartitähappiness;

paripürëaù-full; bhavet-is; kämaù-desire; satya-saìkalpatä-wishes become true; tathä-as.
A person who places the päraka mantra on the tip of his tongue becomes happy. His desires become
fulfilled.
Text 119
dvi-vidhä prema-bhaktis tü çrutä dåñöä tathaiva ca

akhaëòa-paramänandas
tad-gato jïeya-lakñaëaù
dvi-vidhä-two kinds; prema-bhaktiù-loving devotion; tu-indeed; çrutä-heard; dåñöä-seen; tathä-so;

eva-indeed; ca-and; akhaëòa-unbroken; parama-änandaùbliss; tad-gataù-attained; jïeya-lakñaëaù-
known.
Prema-bhakti (devotional service in pure love of God, is of two kinds: that attained by hearing about
Me and that attained by seeing Me. A person who has thus fallen in love with Me becomes filled with a
bliss that never breaks.
Text 120
açru-pätaà kvacin nåtyaà

kvacit premäti-vihvalaù
kvacit tasya mahä-mürcchä
mad-guëo géyate kvacit
açru-pätam-shedding tears; kvacit-sometimes; nåtyam-dancing; kvacit-sometimes; premäti-

vihvalaù-overcome with love; kvacit-sometimes; tasya-of him; mahä-mürcchä-fainting; mad-guëaù-My
virtues; géyate-glorified; kvacit-sometimes.
Sometimes he sheds tears. Sometimes he dances. Sometimes he becomes overcome with love.
Sometimes he faints. Sometimes he glorifies Me in song.
Text 121
atha prapaïcätétam. ädi-värähe
anyaiva käcit sä såçöir

vidhätur vyatirekiëé
na yat kñetra-guëän vaktum
éçvaro 'péçvaro yataù
atha-now; prapaïca-the material world; atétam-beyond; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; anya-
another eva-indeed; käcit-certain; sä-it; såçöir-creation; vidhätur-of the creator; vyatirekiëé-
distinguished; na-not; yat-what; kñetra-of the place; guëän-virtues; vaktum-to describe» éçvaraù-able;
api-even; éçvaraù-Çiva; yataù-because.
Mathura' is Beyond the Material World of Five Elements

Mathura' was not created by Brahmä. Even Lord Çiva has not the power to properly describe
Mathurä's glories.
Text 122
tan-maëòalaà mäthuraà hi
viñëu-cakropari sthitam
padmäkäraà sadä tatra
vartate çäçvataà nåpa
skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tan-maëòalam- mäthuram-the

circle of Mathurä; hi-indeed; viñëu-cakra-upari-above Lord Viñëu's circle; sthitam-situated; padma-
äkäram-in the form of a lotus; sadä-always; tatra-there; vartate-is; çäçvatam-eternaly; nåpa-O king.
O king, this circle of Mathurä is like a lotus eternally above the circle of Lord Viñëu's realm.
Text 123
åñir mäthura-nämatra
tapaù kurvati çäçvate
tato 'sya mäthuraà nämä-
bhavad äòhyaà çriyä yutam
pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; åñir-sage; mäthura-näma-named

Mäthura; atra-here; tapaù kurvati-performs austerities; çäçvate-always; tataù-therefore; asya-of him;
mäthuram-Mathurä; näma-name; abhavad-was; äòhyam-enriched; çriyä-the goddess of fortune; yutam-
with.
A sage named Mäthura performed austerities there for a long time. Beautiful Mathurä is named after
him.
Text 124
tatraiva nirväëa-khaëòe
nityaà me mathuräà viddhi

vanaà våndävanaà tathä
yamunäà gopa-kanyaç ca
tathä gopäla-bälakän
tatra-there; eva-indeed; nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirväëa-khaëòa; nityam-always; me-My; mathuräm-
Mathurä; viddhi-know; vanam-forest; våndävanam-Vrndavana; tathä-so; yamunäm-Yamunä; gopa-
kanyaù-gopés; ca-and; tathä-so; gopäla-bälakän-gopa boys.
In that same book, in the Nirväëa-khaëòa, it is said:
Know that My Mathurä is eternal. So also is Våndävana forest. So also are the Yamunä, the gopés,
and the gopa boys.
Text 125
aho na jänanti narä duräçayäù

purià madéyäà paramäà sanätaném
surendra-nägendra-munéndra-saàstutäà
manoramäà täà mathuräà paräà gatém
ahaù-Oh; na-not; jänanti-know; naräh-people; duräçayäù-wicked; purim-city; madéyäm-My;

paramäm-supreme; sanätaném-eternal; surendra-leaders of the demigods; nägendra-leaders of the
nagas; munéndra-leaders of the sages; saàstutäm-glorified; manoramäm-enchanting; täm- mathuräm-
this Mathurä; paräm- gatém-the supreme destination.
Wicked men cannot understand My eternal, beautiful, transcendental city of Mathurä, which is the
supreme destination, and which is glorified by the kings of the demigods, nägas, and sages.
Text 126
atha deva-traya-rüpatvam. pädme pätäla-khaëòe
ma-käre ca u-käre ca
a-käre cänta-saàsthite
mäthuraù çabda-niñpanna
om-kärasya tataù samaù
atha-now; deva-traya-rüpatvam-the form of the three demigods; pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma
Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; ma-käre-the syllable ma; ca-and; u-käre-the syllable u; ca-and; a-käre-the
syllable a; ca-and; anta-saàsthite-at the end; mäthuraù-Mathurä; çabda-niñpanna-as sound; om-kärasya-
of om; tataù-to that; samaù-equal.
Mathura' Is the Form of the Three Deities

Mathura' is the same as the syllable aum. The a, u, and m in aumkara come from the same letters in
the word Mathurä.
Text 127
mahä-rüdro ma-käraù syäd

u-käro viñëu-saàjïakaù
a-käro 'ntyas tu brahmä syät
tri-çabdaà mäthuraà bhavet
mahä-rüdraù-Çiva; ma-käraù-the letter m; syäd-is; u-käraù-the letter u; viñëu-saàjïakaù-is Viñëu; a-

käraù-the letter a; antyaù-at the end; tu-indeed; brahmä-Brahmä; syät-is; tri-three; çabdam-sounds;
mäthuram-Mathurä; bhavet-is.
In the syllable aum the m is Lord Çiva, the u is Lord Viñëu, and the a is Lord Brahmä. These three
letters are the same as Mathurä.
Text 128
tadä varaù çreñöha uktaù

satya eväbhavat tataù
sä tri-devamayé mürtir
mäthuré tiñöhate sadä
tadä-then; varaù çreñöhah-the best; uktaù-said; satye-in truth; eva-indeed; abhavat-was; tataù-then;
sä-that; tri-devamayé-the three demigods; mürtir-form; mäthuré-Mathurä; tiñöhate-stands; sadä-always.
Of these this is the best statement. Of these this is the truth. Mathura' is eternally the form of these
three demigods.
Text 129
atha çré-viñëu-bhakti-pradatvam. pädme uttara-khaëòe
anyeñu puëya-tértheñu
muktir eva mahä-phalam
muktaiù prärthya harer bhaktir
mathuräyäà ca labhyate
atha-now; çré-viñëu-to Lord Viñëu; bhakti-devotion; pradatvam-giving; pädme uttara-khaëòe-in the

Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; anyeñu-in other; puëya-tértheñu-holy places; muktir-liberation; eva-
indeed; mahä-phalam-great result; muktaiù-by the liberated; prärthya-requested; harer-of Lord Hari;
bhaktir-devotion; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; labhyate-is attained.
Mathura' Gives Lord Viñëu's Devotional Service
In the Padma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa it is said:
Liberation is the great result attained at other holy places. Devotional service to Lord Hari, for
which the liberated souls pray, is attained at Mathurä.
Text 130
tri-rätram api ye tatra

vasanti manujä mune
harir dadyät sukhaà teñäà
muktänäm api durlabham
tri-rätram-three nights; api-even; ye-who; tatra-there; vasanti-reside; manujäh-persons; mune'O

sage; harir-Hari; dadyät-gives; sukham-happiness; teñäm-to them; muktänäm-liberated; api-even;
durlabham-difficult to attain.
O sage, to they who stay there for three nights, Lord Hari happily gives what even the liberated
souls cannot attain.
Text 131
brahmäëòa-puräëe
trailokya-varti-térthänäà
sevanäd durlabhä hi yä
paränandamayé siddhir
mathurä-sparça-mätrataù
brahmäëòa-puräëe-in the Brahmäëòa Puräëa; trailokya-varti-in the three worlds; térthänäm-of the
holy places; sevanäd-by service; durlabhä-rare; hi-indeed; yä-which; paränandamayé-blissful; siddhir-
perfection; mathurä-of Mathurä; sparça-mätrataù-simply by the touch.
The blissful perfection difficult to attain by serving all holy places in the three worlds is attained by
simply touching Mathurä.
Text 132
smaranti mathuräà ye cä mäthureçaà viçämpate

sarva-tértha-phalaà teñäà
syäc ca bhaktir harau parä
skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; smaranti-meditiate; mathuräm-on

Mathurä; ye-who; ca-and; mäthureçam-Mathurä's king; viçämpate-O king; sarva-tértha-phalam-result
of all holy places;; teñäm-of them; syäc-is; ca-and; bhaktir-devotion; harau-to Lord Hari; parä-supreme.
In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura-khaëòa, it is said:
O king, they who meditate on the king of Mathura' attain transcendental devotion to Lord Hari,
which is the fruit of all pilgrimages.
Text 133
atha svataù parama-phalatvam. pädme pätäla-khaëòe
aho madhu-puré dhanyä

vaikuëöhäc ca garéyasé
dinam ekaà niväsena
harau bhaktiù prajäyate
atha-now; svataù-personally; parama-phalatvam-the greatest result; pädme pätäla-khaëòe-in the

Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; ahaù-Oh; madhu-puré-Mathurä; dhanyä-opulent; vaikuëöhäc-than
Vaikuëöha; ca-and; garéyasé-greatesr; dinam-day; ekam-one; niväsena-by residence; harau'for Lord
Hari; bhaktiù-devotion; prajäyate-is born.
Mathura' Gives the Greatest Result
Opulent Mathura' is greater than Vaikuëöha. Living there for a single day creates genuine devotion
to Lord Hari.
Text 134
atha sapta-puréëäà tu
sarvotkåñöaà tu mäthuram
çrüyatäà mahimä devi
vaikuëöha-bhuvanottamaù
atha-now; sapta-7; puréëäm-of the cities; tu-indeed; sarva-utkåñöam-best of all; tu-indeed;

mäthuram'Mathurä; çrüyatäm-should be heard; mahimä-glory; devi-O goddess; vaikuëöha-in thre
spiritual world;bhuvana-abode; uttamaù-highest.
Mathura' is the best of the seven holy cities. O goddess, please hear of its glories greater than
Vaikuëöha.
Text 135
ädi-värähe
bhür-bhuvah-svas-tale väpi
na pätäla-tale 'malam
nordhva-loke mayä dåñöaà
tädåk kñetraà vasundhare
ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; bhür-bhuvah-svas-tale-on Bhur, Bhuvar, and Svar; vä-or; api-
and; na-not; pätäla-tale'in hell; amalam-pure; na-not; ürdhva-loke-in the higher world; mayä-by Me;
dåñöam-seen; tädåk-like this; kñetram-a pläe; vasundhare-O earth.
Not in Bhürloka, Bhuvarloka, Svarloka, Pätälaloka, or Urdhvaloka have I seen any place like this, O
earth-goddess.
Text 136
värähe
labhänäà mathurä-läbho
jïänänäà jïänam uttamam
priténäà paramä pritir
gaténäà gatir uttamä
värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; labhänäm-of attainments; mathurä-of Mathurä; läbhaù-the attainment»
jïänänäm-of knowledges; jïänam-knowledge; uttamam-utlimate; priténäm-of loves; paramä-ultimate;
pritir-love; gaténäm-of goals; gatir-goal; uttamä-ultimate.
Attainment of Mathura' is the greatest of attainments. Knowledge of Mathura' is the greatest of

knowledges. Love for Mathura' is the greatest of loves. The goal of Mathura' is the greatest of goals.
Text 137
rahasyänäà rahasyaà ca
kriyänäà ca mahä-kriyä
etan maraëa-käle tu
smartavyaà manasäpi ca
yadécchet paramäà siddhià
saàsärasya ca mokñaëam
rahasyänäm-of secrets; rahasyam-the secret; ca-and; kriyänäm-of actions; ca-and; mahä-kriyä-
greatest action; etat-this; maraëa-käle-at the time of death; tu-indeed; smartavyam-should be
remembered; manasä-by the heart; api-and; ca-and; yadi-if; icchet-desires; paramäm-supreme;
siddhim-perfection; saàsärasya-of the material world; ca-and; mokñaëam-liberation.
The secret of Mathura' is the greatest secret. Actions in Mathura' are the greatest actions. If one
yearns for the supreme perfection and release from the cycle of birth and death, he should, with all his
heart, meditate on Mathura' at the time of his death.
Text 138
atha mathurä-maëòala-sémäjïänam. ädi-värähe
viàçatir yojanänäà tu
atha-now; mathurä-maëòala-of the circle of Mathurä; séma-boundaries; jïänam-boundaries are

unknown; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; viàçatir'20; yojanänäm-of yojanas; tu-indeed;
mäthuram-Mathura' mama-My; maëòalam-circle.
The Boundaries of the Circle of Mathurä Are Unknown
My circle of Mathura' is 20 yojanas (160 miles).
Text 139
tathä pädme yamunä-mähätmye
ramyam apsarasäà sthänaà

yasmimç caïcalatäà gataù
yäyävaraù purä vipras
tapasvé vijitendriyaù
tathä-as; pädme yamunä-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Yamuna-mahatmya; ramyam-charming;

apsarasäm-of apsaras; sthänam-place; yasmin-where; caïcalatäm- gataù-went; yäyävaraù-Yäyävara;
purä'before; vipraùvipra; tapasvé-austere; vijitendriyaù-controlling the senses.
In the Padma Puräëa, Yamunä-mähatmya, it is said:

One day an austere, sense-controlled brähmaëa named Yäyävara went to the beautiful place
Apsaras-tértha.
Text 140
cira-kälaà prataptaà tam

indra-çäpägninärditam
spåñöä väri-kanenenaà
mocayitvä tu pätakät
vimänenärka-varëena
präpayät taà surälayam
cira-kälam-for a long time; prataptam-austerities; tam-this; indra-Indra's; çäpa-curse; agninä-by the

fire; arditam-tormented; spåñöä-touched;û väri-kanena-by a drop of water; enam-this; mocayitvä-
freeing; tu-indeed; pätakät-from sins; vimänena-by an airmplace; arka-varëena-splendid as the sun;
präpayät-brought; tam-him; surälayam-to the abode of the demigods.
Tormented by the fire of Indra's curse, he performed austerities for a long time, but it was only
when he was touched by a single drop of water there that he at once became free from his sin and an
airplane splendid as the sun took him to the home of the demigods.
Text 141
püjyamänädareëärghyair
vänaprasthair yathä-vidhi
mäthura-maëòalaà praptä
tasmäd devarñi-sevitä
püjyamäna-worshiped; adareëa-with respect; arghyair-with arghya; vänaprasthair-vy Vanaprasthas;

yathä-vidhi'following the rules; mäthura-maëòalam-the circle of Mathurä; praptä-attained; tasmäd'from
that; devarñi-by Närada; sevitä-served.
Respectfully worshiped with arghya by the vänaprasthas and served by the sages, the Yamunä river
flows through Mathura'-maëòala.
Text 142
pävayitvä kurün deçän

çürasenän samäviçat
vanäni dvädaça sphéta-
sphétäni guëa-sampadä
pävayitvä-purifying; kurün-Kurus; deçän-lands; çürasenän-Surasenas; samäviçat-entered; vanäni-

forests; dvädaça-12; sphéta-sphétäni-great; guëa-sampadä-rich with good qualities.
After purifying the Kuru and Çürasena lands, it enters twelve great and glorious forests.
Text 143
kramäd viçräntim äsädya

viçräntä keçavälaye
sudarçanopari-gatä
gata-çrama-samépa-gä
kramäd-gradually; viçräntim-Viçränti; äsädya-attaining; viçräntä keçavälaye-abode of Kåñëa;

sudarçana-Sudarsana; upari-gatä-above; gata-çrama-samépa-gä-near Gataçrama.
Gradually it reaches Viçränti-tértha in the abode of Lord Keçava. It goes to Sudarçana and then it
flows by Viçräma-ghäöa.
Text 144
ity upakramya
açliñöa vasudevena
sat-kåtyäbhyarcya täpané
sampräptä puëya-salilä
su-puëyaà dhrauvyam äçramam
iti-thus; upakramya-following; açliñöa-embraced; vasudevena-by Kåñëa; sat-kåtya

abhyarcya'respectfully worshiped; täpané-Ymauna; sampräptä-attained; puëya-salilä-pure waters; su-
puëyam-sacred; dhrauvyam äçramam-Dhruva's äçrama.
Lord Väsudeva respectfully worships and embraces the Yamunä, which with its pure waters flows
to pure Dhruva-äçrama.
Text 145
sampräptä puëya-salilä
su-puëyaà reëukäçramam
dékñito yatra rämo 'bhüt
sarva-kñatra-kñayädhvare
sampräptä-attained; puëya-salilä-pure water; su-puëyam-sacred; reëukäçramam-Renukasrama;

dékñitaù-initiated; yatra-where; rämaù-Rama; abhüt-was; sarva-kñatra-kñayädhvare-in the sacrifice to
kill all the kçatriyas.
With its pure waters it flows to pure Reëuka'-äçrama, where Lord Räma was initiated to perform a
yajna to kill all the kñatriyas.
Text 146
tataù prayätä yamunä

bharatasyäçvamedhikam
iñöaà çäkuntaleyena
säraìgair yatra saptabhiù
tataù-then; prayätä-gone; yamunä-Yamuna; bharatasya-of Bharata; açvamedhikam-asvamedha;

iñöam-done; çäkuntaleyena-the son of Sakuntalä; säraìgair-saranga-yajnas» yatra-where; saptabhiù-
seven.
Then the Yamuna' flows by the place where Bharata performed an äçvamedha-yajïa and the place
where Çakuntalä's son performed seven säraìga-yajïas.
Text 147
atha sa saptabhir medhyaiù

somapendro 'py amadyata
tataù pratyaìmukhi bhütvä
sampräptä çaukaréà purém
yasyaà dharäà samuddhartuà
utpannaç cädiçükaraù
atha-now; sah-he; saptabhir medhyaiù-with seven sacrifices; somapendraù-Indraq; api-also;

amadyata'was pleased; tataù-then; pratyäìmukhi bhütvä-turning west; sampräptä-attained; çaukarém-
puré-Saukari Puri; yasyam-in which; dharäm-earth; samuddhartum- utpannaù-lifted; ca-and;
adiçükaraù-Varäha.
Indra was pleased when he drank soma at those seven yajïas. Then the river turns west and flows to
Çaukaré Puré, where Lord Varäha lifted the earth.
Text 148
tatas taà nagarià çauré

bhütvä pratyaìmukhi punaù
parikramya viniñkräntä
jihma-gatyeva pannagé
tataù-then; tam-that; nagarim-city; çauré bhütvä pratyaìmukhi punaù parikramya -continuing

west;viniñkräntä-crooked; jihma-gatyä iva pannagé-like a snake.
Continuing west, the river circles that city and then continues with crooked motions as a snake.
Text 149
tataù sa çürasenebhyaù
païcalänäà vimukti-dä
iñöakäçramam äpede
vaçiñöhäyatanaà mahat
tataù-then; sa-it; çürasenebhyaù-from the land of Surasena; païcalänäm-to the people pof Pancala-
desa; vimukti-liberation; dä-giving; iñöakäçramam-Istakasrama; äpede-attained; vaçiñöhäyatanam-the
home of Vaçiñöa Muni; mahat-great.
Then it leaves the land of Çurasena and gives liberation to the people of Päïcäla-deça, and then it
flows to iñöaka-äçrama, the home of Vaçiñöa Muni.
Text 150
etena yäyä-varam adhikåtya çaukaré-vaöeçvara-paryantaà mathurä-maëòalaà jïeyam. evam eva

sarväsu dikñö api jïeyam. viàçati-yojanätmake bahu-térthavat tvayä viçeñaù.
etena-thus; yäyä-varam-Yayavara; adhikåtya-in relation; çaukaré-vaöeçvara-paryantam-from

Saukari to Vatesvara; jïeyam-is known; evam-thus; eva-indeed; sarväsu dikñu-in all directions; api-
also; jïeyam'known; viàçati-yojanätmake-20 yojanas; bahu-térthavat-like a great holy place; tvayä-by
you; viçeña-specific.
In this way the circle of Mathura' goes from Yäyävara-äçrama to Çaukaré Puré to Vaçiñöha-äçrama.
Turning to all directions, it makes a circle 20 yojanas (160 miles, in circumference. There are many
holy places within that circle.
Text 151
mathurä-khaëòe
mathurä-maëòalaà tad dhi

yojanänäà tu dvädaçe
yatra tértha-sahasräëi
kåñëa-räma-kåtäni ca
mathurä-khaëòe-in Mathura'-khaëòa; mathurä-maëòalam-the circle of Mathurä; tad-that; hi-indeed;

yojanänäm-of yojanas; tu-indeed; dvädaçe-12; yatra-where; tértha-holy places; sahasräëi-thousands;
kåñëa-räma-kåtäni-done by Kåñëa and Balaräma; ca-and.
The circle of Mathura' is 12 yojanas (96 miles, in circumference. Within it are thousands of holy
places where Lord Kåñëa and Lord Räma enjoyed pastimes.
Text 152
tathä hi vaiçiñöhyam
gavyütir dvädaçamayé
dvädaçäraëya-samyutä
taträpi mathurä devi
sarva-siddhi-vidhäyiné
tathä hi-furthermore; vaiçiñöhyam-specific; gavyütir-krosas; dvädaçamayé-12; dvädaça-12; araëya-

forests; samyutä-endowed; tatra-there; api'also; mathurä-Mathurä; devi-O goddess; sarva-siddhi-
vidhäyiné-granting all perfections.
A Specifé Description (in the Mathurä-khaëòa)
Its measurement is 12 kroças (24 miles). It has twelve forests. O goddess, within it is Mathurä,
which grants all perfections.
Text 153
taträpi padmäkåter vaiçiñöyam
idaà padmaà mahä-bhäge

sarveñäà mukti-däyakam
karëikäyäà sthito devi
keçavaù kleça-näçanaù
tatra-there; api-also; padma-of a lotus; äkåter-form; vaiçiñöyam-specific; idam-this; padmam-lotus;

mahä-bhäge-O fortunate one; sarveñäm-to all; mukti-liberation; däyakam-giving; karëikäyäm-whorl;
sthitaù-standing; devi-O goddess; keçavaù'Kåñëa; kleça-sufferings; näçanaù-destroying.
In the Same Scripture a Description of Mathura' as a Lotus Flower
O beautiful girl, this place is a great lotus flower that gives liberation to all. O goddess, in the whorl
of this lotus Lord Keçava, the destroyer of troubles, stays.
Text 154
karëikäyäà måtä ye tu
te narä mukti-bhäginaù
madhya-paträ måtä ye ca
teñäà muktir vasundhare
karëikäyäm-in the whorl; måtäù-after death; ye-who; tu-indeed; te-they; naräù mukti-
bhäginaù'liberated souls; madhya-paträ-in the middle leaf; måtäù-after death; ye-who; ca-and; teñäm-of
them; muktir-liberation» vasundhare-O earth.
They who die in the whorl of this lotus become liberated. O earth-goddess,they who die in the
middle leaves of this lotus become liberated.
Text 155
paçcime tu harià devaà

govardhana-niväsinäm
dåñövä taà deva-deveçaà
kià manaù paritapyase
paçcime-in the west; tu-indeed; harim- devam-the Deity of Lord Hari; govardhana-niväsinäm-
residing on Govardhana Hill; dåñövä-having seen; tam- deva-deveçam-the master of the demigods;
kim-what?; manaù-heart; paritapyase-suffers.
What heart, seeing the Deity of Lord Hari, who resides on Govardhana Hill in the western part of
this lotus, and who is the master of the demigods, will remain unhappy?
Text 156
uttareëa tu govindaà
dåñövä devaà paraà çubham
näsau patati saàsäre
yävad ähüta-samplavam
uttareëa-in the north; tu-indeed; govindam-Lord Govinda; dåñövä-having seen; devam-Deity;

param-transcendental; çubham-handsome; na-not; asau-he; patati-falls; saàsäre-into birth and death;
yävad-as far as; ähüta-samplavam-an ocean.
A person who sees the handsome Deity of Lord Govinda in the northern part of this lotus will not
fall into the ocean of repeated birth and death.
Text 157
viçränti-samjïakaà térthaà
pürva-patre vyavasthitam
yaà dåñövä tu naro yäti
muktià nästy atra saàçayaù
viçränti-Viçränti; samjïakam-named; tértham-holy place; pürva-eastern; patre-on the petal;û

vyavasthitam-situated; yam-whom; dåñövä-having seen; tu-indeed; naraù-a person; yäti-attains;
muktim-liberation; na-not; asti-is; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.
A person who sees Viçränti-tértha on the eastern petals of this lotus attains liberation. Of this there
is no doubt.
Text 158
dakñiëenottamaà viddhi
pratimäà divya-rüpiëém
mahä-käyäà su-rüpäà ca
keçaväkära-sannibhäm
yaà dåñövä manujo devi
brahmaloke mahéyate
dakñiëena-in the south; uttamam-supreme; viddhi-know; pratimäm-Deity; divya-rüpiném-splendid;

mahä-käyäm-large; su-rüpäm-handsome; ca-and; keçava-äkära-sannibhäm-Keçava; yam-whim;
dåñövä-having seen; manujaù-a person; devi-O goddess; brahmaloke-on Brahmaloka; mahéyate-
glorified.
Know that in the south is a large, splendidly handsome Deity of Lord Keçava. O goddess, a person
who sees this Deity becomes glorious in the spiritual world.
Text 159
athätra käla-viçeñe niväsa-phalam. ädi-värähe tatra jyaiñöhe
jyaiñöhasya çukla-dvädaçyäà
snätvä tu niyatendriyaù
mathuräyäà harià dåñövä
präpnoti paramäà gatim
atha-now; atra-here; käla-time; viçeñe-s[ecific; niväsa-of residence; phalam-result; ädi-värähe-in the

Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tatra-there; jyaiñöhe-in the month of Jyaistha; jyaiñöhasya-of Jyaistha; çukla-
dvädaçyäm-on the çukla-dvädaçé; snätvä-having bathed; tu-indeed; niyata-controlling; indriyaù-the
senses; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; harim-the Deity of Lord Hari; dåñövä-having seen; präpnoti-attains;
paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination.
The Result of Residing at Mathura' During Certain Specifé Times
In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa the month of Jyaiñöha (May-June, is described:

A person who is sense-controlled and who bathes in Mathura' during the çukla-dvädaçi in the month
of Jyaiñöha attains the supreme destination.
Text 160
cäturmäsye. ädi-värähe påthivyäà yäni térthäni

ä-samudra-saräàsi ca
mathuräyäà gamiñyanti
supte caiva janärdane
cäturmäsye-during Caturmasya; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; påthivyäm-on the earth; yäni-
which; térthäni-holy places; ä-samudra-saräàsi-to the oceans and lakes; ca-and; mathuräyäm-in
Mathurä; gamiñyanti-will go; supte-asleep; ca-and; eva-certainly; janärdane-Kåñëa.
Residing in Mathura' During Caturmasya

When Lord Janärdana will go to sleep all holy places, lakes, and seas on the earth will go to
Mathurä.
Note: Lord Kåñëa sleeps during the four months of Cäturmäsya.
Text 161
caturo varñikän mäsän

madhu-puryä vasemahi
sarväni tatra térthäni
vividhäni vasanti ca
caturaù-four; varñikän-of the monsoon season; mäsän-months; madhu-puryä-of Mathurä; vasemahi-

let us reside; sarväni-all; tatra-there; térthäni-holy places; vividhäni-various; vasanti-reside; ca-and.
Let us reside in Mathura'-puré during the four months of the monsoon season, when all holy places
also reside there.
Text 162
tatraiva janmäñöamyäm
janmäñöami-dine präpte
tatra yo mäà prapaçyati
janma-koöi-kåtaà päpaà
tat-kñaëäd eva naçyati
tatra-there; eva-indeed; janmäñöamyäm-on janmastami; janmäñöami-dine-when Janmastami day;

präpte-has arrived; tatra-there; yaù-who; mam-Me;û prapaçyati-sees; janma-koöi-kåtam-done in
millions of births; päpam-sin; tat-kñaëad-in that moment; eva'certainly; naçyati-perish.
Residing in Mathura' During Janmäñöamé
In the same scripture Lord Kåñëa says:
For a person who sees Me there (in Mathurä, during Janmäñöamé, the sins of millions of births
perish in a single moment.
Text 163
bhädre mäsi mamäñöäbhyäà

yaù karoti mamärcanam
sarvaà päpaà parityajya
mama sthänaà sa gacchati
bhädre mäsi-in the month of Bhadra; mama-My; añöäbhyäm-on janmastami; yaù-who; karoti-does;
mama-My;rcanam-worship; sarvam-all; päpam-sin» parityajya-leaving; mama-My; sthänam-abode;
sah-he; gacchati-goes.
A person who worships Me during My Janmäñöamé in the month of Bhädra becomes free from all
sins and goes to My abode.
Texts 164 and 165
sarvaà taptaà tapas tena

sarvaà dänaà ca taiù kåtam
yaiù kåtaà mathuräà gatvä
bhadreñöamyäà vasundhare
snätvä viçränti-tértheñu
püjanaà me 'valokanam
sarvam-all; taptam-austerities; tapaù-performed; tena-by him; sarvam-all; dänam-charity; ca-and;

taiù-by them; kåtam-done;û yaiù-by whom; kåtam-done; mathuräm-to Mathurä; gatvä-having gone;
bhadreñöamyäm-on auspicious Janmastami; vasundhare'O earth; snätvä-having bathed; viçränti-
tértheñu-at Viçränti-tértha; püjanam-worship; me-of Me» avalokanam-sight.
All austerities are automatically performed and all charity automatically given by they who, going
to Mathura' during Janmastami in the month of Bhadra, bathe in Viçränti-tértha, worship me, and see
My Deity-form, O earth-goddess.
Text 166
viçeñataù kärttike. pädme kärttika-mähätmye närada-väkyam
yatra kuträpi deçe ca

kärttike snäna-dänataù
agni-hotra-samaà puëyaà
püjäyäà tu viçeñataù
viçeñataù-specifically; kärttike-in karttika; pädme kärttika-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa,

Kärttika-mahatmya; närada-of Narada; väkyam-words; yatra-where; kuträpi-in a certain; deçe-country;
ca-and; kärttike-during Kärttika; snäna-from bathing; dänataù-and giving charity; agni-hotra-to an
agnihotra sacrifice; samam-equal; puëyam-pious merit; püjäyäm-in worship; tu-indeed; viçeñataù-
specifically.
Residing in Mathura' During the Month of Kärttika
In the Kärttika-mähätmya, Närada says:
By bathing in sacred places and giving charity during the month of Kärttika, a person in any country
attains piety equal to an agnihotra-yajïa.
Text 167
kurukñetre koöi-guëo
gaìgäyäm api tat-samaù
tato 'dhikaù puñkare syäd
dvärakäyäà tu bhärgava
kurukñetre-in Kurukñetra; koöi-guëaù-millions of times; gaìgäyäm-in the Ganges; api-also; tat-

samaù-equal to that; tataù-than that; adhikaù-greater; puñkare-in Puñkara; syäd-is; dvärakäyäm-in
Dvärakä; tu-indeed; bhärgava-O Bhärgava.
When these activities are performed at Kurukñetra or on the banks of the Ganges, the benefit is
multiplied by millions of times. The benefit is even greater at Puñkara or Dvaraka, O Bhärgava.
Text 168
kåñëa-sälokya-do mäsaù
püja-snänaiç ca kärttikaù
anyaù puryäs tat-samänä
bhavanti mathuräà vinä
kåñëa-sälokya-daù-giving residence on the same planet as Kåñëa; mäsaù-month; püja-with worship;

snänaiù-bathing; ca-and; kärttikaù-Kärttika; anyaù'another; puryäù-of the city; tat-samänä-equal;
bhavanti-are; mathuräm-Mathurä; vinä-without.
In Mathura' bathing and worship during the month of Kärttika place one on the same planet as Lord
Kåñëa. No other holy place is equal to Mathurä.
Text 169
dämodaratvaà hi hares
tatraiväsit yataù kila
mathuräyäà tatas türjo
vaikuëöha-préti-vardhanaù
kärttiko mathuräyäà vai
paramävadhir iñyate
dämodaratvam-the state of being Dämodara; hi-indeed; hareùof Lord Hari; tatra-there; eva-indeed;
äsét-was; yataù-because; kila-indeed» mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tataù-then; tu-indeed; ürjaù-Kärttika;
vaikuëöha-Lord Vaikuëöha; préti-pleasure; vardhanaù-increasing; kärttikaù-Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in
Mathurä; vai'indeed; parama-avadhir-the supreme destination; iñyate-is accepted.
The month of Kärttika, when Lord Hari enjoyed His Dämodara-pastime in Mathurä, delights Lord
Vaikuëöha. The month of Kärttika spent in Mathura' brings the supreme destination.
Text 170
yathä mäghe prayägaù syäd

vaiçäkhe jähnavé tathä
kärttike mathurä sevyä
tatrotkarñaù paro na hi
yathä-as; maghe-in Magha; prayägaù-Prayäga; syäd-is; vaiçäkhe-in vaisakha; jähnavé-the Ganges;

tathä-so; kärttike-in karttika; mathurä-Mathurä; sevyä-to be served; tatra-there; utkarñaù-excellence;
paraù-better; na-not; hi-indeed.
As Prayäga should be served in the month of Mägha, and the Ganges in the month of Vaiçäkhä, so
Mathura' should be served in the month of Kärttika. Nothing is better than that service.
Text 171
mathuräyäà narair ürje

snätvä dämodaro 'rcitaùkåñëa-rüpa hi te jïeyä
nätra käryä vicaraëä
mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; narair-by people; ürje-in Kärttika; snätvä-having bathed; dämodaraù-Lord

Dämodara; arcitaù-worshiped; kåñëa-rüpah-the form of Kåñëa; hi-indeed; te-they; jïeyäh-should be
known; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done; vicaraëä-doubt.
They who, after properly bathing, worship Lord Dämodara in Mathura' during Kärttika, attain forms
like that of Lord Kåñëa. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 172
durlabhaù kärttiko viprä

mathuräyäà nåëäm iha
yatrarcitaù svakaà rüpaà
bhaktebhyaù samprayacchati
durlabhaù-rare; kärttikaù-Kärttika; vipräh-O brähmaëas; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; nåëäm-of people;

iha-here; yatra-where; arcitaù-worshiped; svakam-own; rüpam-form; bhaktebhyaù-to the devotees;
samprayacchati-gives.
O brähmaëas, residence in Mathura' during Kärttika is a rare attainment for humans. To they who
worship Him there and then the Lord gives their original spiritual forms.
Text 173
bhuktià muktià harir dadyäd

arcito 'nyatra sevinäm
bhaktim tu na dadäty eva
yato vaçya-karé hareù
bhuktim-sense gratification; muktim--liberation; harir-Kåñëa; dadyäd-gives; arcitaù-worshiped;

anyatra-in another place; sevinäm-of the servants; bhaktim'devotional service; tu-indeed; na-not;
dadäti-gives; eva-indeed; yataù-because; vaçya-karé-brought under the dominion; hareù-of Kåñëa.
When He is worshiped in any other place, Lord Hari gives only liberation or sense-gratification to
His servants. He does not give them pure devotional service, for that service brings Him under their
dominion.
Text 174
sät öaïjasä harer bhaktir

labhyate kärttike naraiù
mathuräyäà sakåd api
çré-dämodara-sevanät
sä-this; tu-indeed; aïjasä-easily; harer-to Kåñëa; bhaktir-devotion; labhyate-is attained; kärttike-in

karttika; naraiù-by people; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; sakåd-once; api-even; çré-dämodara-sevanät-from
serving Lord Dämodara.
By once serving Lord Dämodara in Mathura' during Kärttika, the people can easily attain pure
devotional service to Lord Hari.
Text 175
mantra-dravya-vihiëaà ca
vidhi-hénaà ca püjanam
manyate kärttike devo
mathuräyäà mad-arcanam
mantra-mantras; dravya-offerings; vihiëam-without; ca-and; vidhi-proper rules; hénam-without; ca-

and; püjanam-worship; manyate-is considered; kärttike-during Kärttika; devaù-the Lord; mathuräyäm-
in Mathurä; mad-arcanam-worship of Me.
They who, even without proper mantras and offerings, and without properly following the rules,
worship Him in Mathura' during Kärttika, the Lord considers His true devotees.
Text 176
yasya päpasya yujyeta

maraëäntä hi niñkåtiù
tac-chuddhy-artham idaà proktaà
präyaçcittaà su-niçcitam
kärttike mathuräyäà vai
çré-dämodara-püjanam
yasya-of whom; päpasya-sin; yujyeta-engaged; maraëäntäh-to the time of death; hi-indeed;

niñkåtiù'atonement; tä-chuddhy-artham-to purify; idam-this; proktam-is said; präyaçcittam-atonement;
su-niçcitam-carefully considered; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vai-indeed; çré-
dämodara-püjanam-worship of Lord Dämodara.
The perfect atonement to purify the sins of a lifetime is: worship Lord Dämodara in Mathura' during
Kärttika.
Text 177
sulabhä mathurä loke

pratyabdaà kärttikas tathä
tathäpi saàsarantéha
narä müòhä bhavämbudhau
sulabhä-easy to attain; mathurä-Mathurä; loke-in this world; pratyabdam-every year; kärttikaù-

Kärttika» tathä-so; tathäpi-still; saàsaranti-go; iha-here; naräh-peple; müòhäh-bewildered; bhava-of
repeated birth and death; ambudhau-in the ocean.
Although Mathura' is easy to visit in this world, and although Kärttika comes every year, the fools
still swim in the ocean of repeated birth and death.
Text 178
kià yajïaiù kià tapobhir vä

térthair anyaiç ca sevitaiù
kärttike mathuräyäà ced
arcyate rädhikä-priyaù
kim-what is the use?; yajïaiù-of sacrifices; kim-what is the use?; tapobhir-of austerities; vä-or;
térthair-holy places; anyaiù-of other; ca-and; sevitaiù-served; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in
Mathurä; ced-if; arcyate-is worshiped; rädhikä-Rädhä's; priyaù-beloved.
What is the use of yajïas? What is the use of austerities? What is the use of serving other holy places
if Çrématé Rädhikä's beloved is worshiped in Mathura' during Kärttika?
Text 179
yäni sarväëi térthäni

nadä nadyaù saräàsi ca
kärttike nivasanty atra
mäthure sarva-maëòale
yäni-which; sarväni-all; térthäni-holy place; nadäh-streams; nadyaù-rivers; saräàsi-lakes; ca-and;

kärttike-in Kärttika; nivasanti-reside; atra-here; mäthure sarva-maëòale-in the circle4 of Mathurä.
All holy places and all holy rivers, streams, and lakes reside in the circle of Mathura' during
Kärttika.
Text 180
paropahäsam uddiçya
kärttike hari-sevayä
mathuräyäà labhed bhaktià
kià punaù çraddhayä naraù
para-upahäsam uddiçya-as a joke; kärttike-in Kärttika; hari-sevayä-with service to Lord Hari;

mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; labhed-attain; bhaktim-devotion; kim-what?; punaù-again; çraddhayä-with
faith; naraù-a person.
They who as a joke serve Lord Hari during Kärttika in Mathura' will attain pure devotional service,
what to speak of they who serve the Lord with faith and devotion.
Text 181
tatraiva dhümrakeçaà prati yama-väkyam
tasmän nåpätmaja çreyaù

paraà kiïcin na-not; vidyate
kärttike mathuräyäà ca
çré-dämodara-püjanät
tatra-there; eva-indeed; dhümrakeçam- prati-to Dhumrakeça; yama-väkyam-words of Yama; tasmät-

from this; nåpätmaja-O prince; çreyaù param-better; kiïcit-something; na-not; vidyate-is; kärttike-in
Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; çré-dämodara-of Lord Dämodara; püjanät-than worship.
In the same scripture Yamaräja says to Dhumrakeça:
Therefore, O prince, nothing is better than to serve Lord Dämodara in Mathura' during Kärttika.
Text 182
na cätra saàçayaù karyaù

éçitåtvaà idaà hareù
räjä hi kasyacid dhåtvä
sarvasvaà cet prayacchati
parasmai kasya kas tatra
niyantä syät prabhor yathä
na-not; ca-and; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt; karyaù-to be done; éçitåtvam-power; idam-this; hareù-of

Kåñëa; räjä-king; hi-indeed; kasyacid-of someone; dhåtva-holding; sarvasvam-everything; cet-if;
prayacchati-gives; parasmai-to another; kasya-of whom?; kaù-who?; tatra-there; niyantä-controller;
syät-is; prabhor-the Lord; yathä-as.
Of this there is no doubt. This is the power of Lord Hari. He can take everything from one person
and He can give everything to another. Who is a controller as powerful as Lord Hari?
Text 183
ayaà sarveçvaraù çrémän

anyathä kartum éçvaraù
aty-alpaà bhuri kurute
bahu tucchaà ca manyate
ayam-He; sarveçvaraù-the Lord of all; çrémän-master of opulences; anyathä-otherwise; kartum-to

do; éçvaraù-able; aty-alpam-tiny; bhuri-great; kurute-makes; bahu-great; tuccham-insignificant; ca-and;
manyate-is considered.
He is the supremely opulent controller of all. He has the power to change anything. He can make the
very small great and He can make the great insignificant.
Text 184
taträpi prabodhinyäm ati-viçeñah. pädme kärttika-mähätmye.
tävad garjanti térthäni

väjimedhädayo makhaù
mathuräyäà priyä viñëor
yävan nayati bodhiné
tatra-there; api-also; prabodhinyäm-on Prabodhini» ati-viçeñah-specificaly; pädme kärttika-

mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mahatmya; tävad-then; garjanti-thunders; térthäni-holy
places; väjimedhädayaù-beginning with açvamedha sacrifices; makhaù-sacrifices; mathuräyäm-in
Mathurä; priyä-dear; viñëor-of Kåñëa; yävan-when; nayati-leads; bodhiné-awakening.
Residence in Mathura' During Prabodhini tithi
In the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya, it is said:
When Lord Viñëu does not wake from His happy sleep on Prabodhiné tithi, then all the holy places
roar with açvamedha-yajïas.
Note: Prabodhiné tithi is the first ekädaçé in the month of Kärttika. On that day the Lord awakens
from His four-month-long nap.
Text 185
saàsära-dava-taptänäà
käma-saukhya-pipäsinäm
çré-kåñëa-päda-padmasya
sännidhyaà çétalaà gåham
saàsära-of birth and death; dava-by the forest fire; taptänäm-burned; käma-of lust; saukhya-the
pleasures; pipäsinäm-thirsty; çré-kåñëa-of Lord Kåñëa; päda-padmasya-of the lotus feet; sännidhyam-
nearness; çétalam-cool; gåham-home.
Çré Kåñëa's lotus feet are a cooling shelter for they who thirst after material happiness but find
themselves burned by the forest-fire of repeated birth and death.
Text 186
mathuräyäà tu kià väcyaà

jägare hari-sannidhau
kärttike bodhinéà präpya
tataù çreyaù paraà hi na
mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; kim-what?; väcyam-can be said; jägare-in the awakening; hari-
sannidhau-near Lord Hari; kärttike-in Kärttika; bodhiném-Prabodhini; präpya-attaining; tataù-than that;
çreyaù param-better» hi-indeed; na-not.
What can be said about approaching the Deity of Lord Hari when He awakens in Mathurä? No day
is better than the Prabodhiné day in the month of Kärttika.
Text 187
räjyam anyatra santyajya

sphétaà nihata-kaëöakam
kärttike mathuräyäà vai
kaimutyaà jägaraà caret
räjyam-kingdom; anyatra-in another place; santyajya-abandoning; sphétam-great; nihata-kaëöakam-

without disturbance; kärttike-in Kärttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vai-indeed; kaimutyam-what is
better?; jägaram-awake; caret-may do.
One should leave any other great and peaceful kingdom, and in Mathura' stay awake through the
night during Prabodhini in the month of Kärttika. What place is better than Mathura' for this?
Text 188
atha dvädaçyäm. viñëu-puräëe
ürjasya çukla-dvädaçyäà
snätvä vai yamunä-jale
atha-now; dvädaçyäm-during dvädaçé; viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; ürjasya-of karttika; çukla-
dvädaçyäm-on çukla-dvädaçé; snätvä-having bathed; vai-indeed; yamunä-jale-in the water of the
Yamunä; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; harim-Lord Hari; dåñövä-having seen; präpnoti-attains; paramäm-
supreme; gatim-destination.
Residing in Mathura' During Dvädaçé
In the Viñëu Puräëa it is said:
A person who during the Çukla-dvädaçé in the month of Kärttika bathes in the Yamunä and sees the
Deity of Lord Hari in Mathura' attains the supreme destination.
Text 189
atha bhéñma-païcake. padme bhéñmaà prati çré-kåñëa-vacanam
tvayä kåte vrate päçcät

khyäsyate bhéñma-païcakam
ye tatra janma-bhümau me
kariñyanti mahä-vratam
mathuräyäà tu gäìgeya
teñäà bhaktiù kare sthitä
atha-now; bhéñma-païcake-in Bhisma-pancaka; padme-in the Padma Puräëa; bhéñmam- prati-to

Bhisma; çré-kåñëa-vacanam-Kåñëa's words; tvayä-by you; kåte-done; vrate-vow; päçcät-after;
khyäsyate-will be known; bhéñma-païcakam-as Bhisma-pancaka; ye-who; tatra-there; janma-
bhümau'in the birthplace; me-My; kariñyanti-will do; mahä-vratam-great vow; mathuräyäm-in
Mathurä; tu-indeed; gäìgeya-O Bhisma; teñäm-of them; bhaktiù-devotion; kare-in the hand; sthitä-
standing.
Residing in Mathura' During Bhéñma-païcaka
In the Padma Puräëa, Çri Kåñëa says to Bhéñma:
O Gäìgeya, this vow you have followed will henceforth be known as Bhéñma-païcaka. They who
follow this great vow in My birthplace, Mathurä, find pure devotional service resting in their hand.
Text 190
särvabhaumas tö indra-padaà
brahmalokas tathäkñayam
yoga-siddhià ca muktià ca
préto yacchämi sarvaçaù
särvabhaumaùroyal power; tu-indeed; indra-padam-the post of Indra; brahmalokaù-Brahmaloka;

tathä-so; akñayam-immortal; yoga-siddhim-mysté power; ca-and; muktim-liberation; ca-and; prétaù-
pleased; yacchämi-I give; sarvaçaù-completely.
Being perfectly pleased with him, I give him royal power, the post of Indra, residence in immortal
Brahmaloka, yogé powers, and liberation.
Text 191
durlabho bhakti-yogo me
mama vaçya-vidhäyakaù
kärttike mathuräyäà ca
vratenänena labhyate
durlabhaù-difficult to attain; bhakti-yogaù-bhakti-yoga; me-of Me; mama-My; vaçya-vidhäyakaù-

brings under the dominion; kärttike-in karttika; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; vratena-vow; anena-
by this; labhyate-is attained.
Pure devotional service to Me which, becausae it places Me under My devotee's dominion, is very
difficult to attain, is easily attained by following this vow in Mathura' during Kärttika.
Text 192
puräëäntare ca
sarväbhiñöa-pradaà proktaà
mäthure bhéñma-païcakam
puräëa-antare-in another Puräëa; ca-and; sarva-all; abhiñöa-desires; pradam-granting; proktam-said;

mäthure-in Mathurä; bhéñma-païcakam-Bhisma-pancaka.
In another place in the Puräëas it is said:
Following the vow of Bhéñma-païcaka in Mathura' is said to fulfill all desires.
Text 193
yathä bhaviñye
bhéñma-païca-dine präpte
mathurä-maëòale hareù
nidrä-ccheda-kare puëye
päduke cävalokayet
yathä-as; bhaviñye-in the Bhaviñya Puräëa; bhéñma-païca-dine präpte-on the day of Bhisma-
pancaka; mathurä-maëòale-in Mathurä; hareù-of Kåñëa; nidrä-ccheda-kare-awakening from sleep;
puëye-sacred; päduke-sandals; ca-and; avalokayet-may see.
In the Bhaviñya Puräëa it is said:
A person who observes Bhiñma-païcaka and Prabodhiné tithi in Mathura' will see Lord Hari's
splendid sandals.
Text 194
atha mathurä-vanäntargata-madhupuré-mähätmyam. skände mathurä-khaëòe
madhor vanaà prathamato

yatra vai mathurä-puré
madhu-daityo hato yatra
hariëä viçva-mürtiëä
atha-now; mathurä-vana-Mathura' Forest; antargata-within; madhupuré-Mathura' City; mähätmyam-

glorification; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; mathurä-khaëòe'Mathurä-khaëòa; madhor vanam-
Madhuvana; prathamataù-first; yatra-where; vai-indeed; mathurä-puré-Mathura' City; madhu-daityaù-
the demon Madhu; hataù-killed; yatra-where; hariëä-by Lord Kåñëa; viçva-mürtiëä-the form of the
universe.
Glorification of Mathurä City in Mathura' Forest
In the Skända Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, it is said:
First is Madhuvana, where is Mathura' City, where Lord Hari, who appears as the Universal Form,
killed the Madhu demon.
Text 195
tatraiva bhagavad-väsa
ävirbhävo harer nåpa
viçramaç ca hares tatra-there;
devänäà ca nåpottama
tatra-there; eva-indeed; bhagavad-of the Lord; väse-in the residence; ävirbhävaù-appearance; harer-
of Lord Kåñëa; nåpa-O king» viçramaù-pastimes; ca-and; hareù-of Lord Hari; tatra-there; devänäm-of
the demigods; ca-and; nåpottama-O great king.
There the Supreme Personality of Godhead resides. O king, there Lord Hari appeared. O great king,
there Lord Hari and the demigods enjoyed pastimes.
Text 196
yo vai madhuvane snäti

yamunä-jalaà açrétaù
sarva-tértheñu sa snätas
tat-phalaà labhate dhruvam
yaù-who; vai-indeed; madhuvane-in Madhuvana; snäti-bathes; yamunä-jalam-in the Yamunä's

waters; açrétaù'sheltered; sarva-tértheñu-in all holy places; sah-he; snätaùhas bathed; tat-phalam-result;
labhate'attains; dhruvam-indeed.
A person who bathes in the waters of the Yamuna in Madhuvana attains the result of bathing in all
holy places.
Text 197
sarveñäà nåpa siddhiù syät

tasmin madhuvane nåëäm
tapasä bhakti-yogena
snäna-mätreëa karmaëä
sarveñäm-of al; nåpa-O king; siddhiù-perfection; syät-is; tasmin-there; madhuvane-in Madhuvana;

nåëäm-of people; tapasä-with austerity; bhakti-yogena-bhakti-yoga; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing;
karmaëä-by the activity.
O king, a person who performs the devotional austerity of merely bathing in Madhuvana attains all
perfections.
Text 198
aho madhuvanaà dhanyaà

yatra rämaù sahänujaù
karoti karma lokänäà
hitäya ca manéñinäm
ahaù-Oh; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; dhanyam-opulent; yatra-where; rämaù-Balaräma; saha-with;

anujaù-His younger brother; karoti-does; karma-action; lokänäm-of the worlds; hitäya-for the benefit;
ca-and; manéñinäm-thoughtful.
Madhuvana, where Balaräma and His younger brother performed actions for the benefit of
thoughtful men, . . .
Text 199
mardito yatra kåñëena

cograsenätmajo 'suraù
pävitaù sparça-mätreëa
gatià nétaç ca yoginäm
marditaù-killed; yatra-where; kåñëena-by Kåñëa; ca-and; ugrasena-Ugrasena's; ätmajaù-son;û

asuraù-demon; pävitaù-purified; sparça-mätreëa-simply by a touch; gatim-destination; nétaù-brought;
ca-and; yoginäm-of the yogis.
. . .and where Kåñëa killed Ugrasena's demon son, purified him with a mere touch, and gave him the
desination attained by the yogés, is filled with transcendental opulence.
Text 200
tasmin madhuvane räjan

durghataà kià hari-priye
vaktuà nämäni térthänäà
çakyante na mayädhunä
tasmin madhuvane yäni
mähätmyaà ca nåpottama
tasmin-there; madhuvane-in Madhuvana; räjan-O king; durghatam-difficult to attain; kim-what?;

hari-priye'dear to Lord Hari; vaktum-to say; nämäni-names; térthänäm-holy places; çakyante-are able;
na-not; mayä-by me; adhunä-now; tasmin-in this; madhuvane-Madhuvana; yäni-which; mähätmyam-
glorification;- ca-and; nåpottama-O great king.
O king, what is difficult to attain in Madhuvana, which is so dear to Lord Hari? O great king, I do
not now have the power to name Madhuvana's forests and describe their glories.
Text 201
aho madhuvanaà dåñöaà

çrutaà vä tat su-sevinäm
sthitaà vä yaiù suraöitaà
dhanyäs te bhuvi mänaväù
ahaù-Oh; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; dåñöam-seen; çrutam-heard; vä-or; tat-that; su-sevinäm-of the

servants; sthitam-situation; vä-or; yaiù-by whom; suraöitam-glorified; dhanyäù-fortunate; te-they;
bhuvi-on the earth; mänaväù-people.
They who see, hear about, serve, reside in, and glorify Madhuvana, are fortunate in this world.
Text 202
evaà pradakñiëaà kåtvä

navaméà çukla-kaumudém
sarvän kulän samädäya
viñëuloke mahéyate
evam-in this way; pradakñiëam-circumambulation; kåtvä-doing; navamém-the ninth day; çukla-

kaumudém-the âright moon; sarvän-all; kulän-relatives; samädäya-taking; viñëuloke-on Viñëuloka;
mahéyate-glorified.
A person who circumambulates Madhuvana on the ninth day of the bright moon during Kärttika, is
glorified in Viñëuloka with all his relatives.
Text 203
kramataù pada-vinyäsä
yävantaù sarvato diçaù
tävantaù kula-sambhütaù
svarge tiñöhänti çäçvataù
kramataù-gradually; pada-vinyäsä-placing his steps; yävantaù-as; sarvataù-in all; diçaù-directions;

tävantaù-so; kula-sambhütaù-with his family; svarge-in the spiritual world; tiñöhänti-stays; çäçvataù-
eternally.
When a person wanders in Madhuvana, placing his steps in every direction, he finds himself
eternally residing in the spiritual world with his family.
Text 204
anya-deça-gato dürät
parikramati yo naraù
tasya sandarçanäd eva
pütäù syur gata-kalmañäù
anya-another; deça-country; gataù-gone; dürät-from far away; parikramati-circumambulates; yaù-

who; naraù-a person; tasya-of him; sandarçanäd'from the sight; eva-indeed; pütäù-purified; syur-
become; gata-gone; kalmañäù-sins.
The sight of a person who comes from another country far away and circumambulates Mathurä,
purifies the people and chases away their sins.
Text 205
çruto yais tu vidüra-sthaiù

kåta-yatro naro naraiù
sarva-päpa-vinirmuktäs
te 'pi yänti paräà gatim
çrutaù-heard; yaiù-by whom; tu-indeed; vidüra-sthaiù-far away; kåta-yätraù-journeyed; naraù-a

person; naraiù'with people; sarva-all; päpa-sins; vinirmuktäùfreed; te-they; api-also; yänti-attain;
paräm- gatim-the supreme destination.
They who hear about others who come from far away to visit Madhuvana become free from all sins
and go to the supreme destination.
Text 206
mathuräyäà naro gatvä

dåñövä devaà svayambhuvam
pradakñiëäyäà yat puëyaà
tat puëyaà labhate hi saù
mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; naraù-a person; gatvä-having gone; dåñövä-having seen; devam-Lord;

svayambhuvam-Svayambü; pradakñiëäyäm-in circumambulating; yat puëyam-what piety; tat puëyam-
that piety; labhate-attains; hi-indeed; saù-he.
A person who goes to Mathura' and sees the Deity of Lord Svayambhü attains the piety of
circumambulating Madhuvana.
Text 207
atha janma-sthäna-mähätmyam. skände

japopaväsa-nirato
mathuräyäà ñaòänana
janma-sthänaà samäsädya
sarva-päpaiù pramucyate
atha-now; janma-birth; sthäna-place; mähätmyam-glorification; skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; japa-

japa; upaväsa-and fasting; nirataù-engaged; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ñaòänana-O Karttikeya; janma-
sthänam-birthplace; samäsädya-attaining; sarva-päpaiù-from all sins; pramucyate-freed.
The Glories of the Lord's Birthplace
In the Skända Puräëa it is said:

O Kärttikeya, a person who fasts and chants japa at the Lord's birthplace becomes free from all sins.
Text 208
atha kärttike. pädme
kärttike janma-sadane
keçavasya ca ye naräù
sakåt praviñöäù çré-kåñëaà
te yänti param avyayam
atha-now; kärttike-during Kärttika; pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; kärttike-in Kärttika; janma-sadane-
at the birth-chamber; keçavasya-of Lord Keçava; ca-and; ye-who; naräù-pewrsons; sakåt-once;
praviñöäù-entered; çré-kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; te-they; yänti-attain; param avyayam-eternal abode.
The Glories of the Lord's Birthplace During the Month of Kärttika
In the Padma Puräëa it is said:
They who once enter Lord Keçava's birth-chamber during the month of Kärttika go to eternal Lord
Kåñëa.
Text 209
tatraiva prabodhanyäm
ekaivaikädaçé kåñëa-
janma-gehe kåtä naraiù
tato 'dhikaà prakartavyaà
loke kiïcin na vidyate
tatra-there; eva-indeed; prabodhanyäm-on Prabodhini; eka-one; eva-indeed; ekädaçé-ekädaçé;

kåñëa-janma-gehe-Kåñëa's birth-chamber; kåtä-done; naraiù-by people; tataù-than that; adhikam-
greater; prakartavyam-to be done; loke-in the world; kiïcit-something; na-not; vidyate-is.
The Glories of the Lord's Birthplace During the Prabodhiné Day Are Described in the Same Scripture:
In this world nothing is better than to observe Pabodhiné in Lord Kåñëa's birth-chamber.
Text 210
rätrau jägaraëaà taträ prétyä kurvanti ye naräù

saàsära-moha-sväpnänte
sadä jägrati jägrati
rätrau-at night; jägaraëam-staying awake; tatra-there; prétyä-with happiness; kurvanti-do; ye-who;

naräù-people; saàsära-moha-sväpnänte-at the end of the bewildering sleep of repeated birth and death;
sadä'always; jägrati jägrati-awaken.
They who happily remain awake during that night awaken from the bewildering sleep of repeated
birth and death.
Text 211
anyaträpi priyä viñëor

jägare syät prabodhiné
kià punar mathuräyäà sä
tato vai janma-sadmani
anyatra-in another place; api-also; priyä-dear; viñëor-to Kåñëa; jägare-staying awake; syät-is;
prabodhiné-Prabodhini; kim-how much?; punar-more; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; sä-that; tataù-
therefore; vai'indeed; janma-sadmani-birth-chamber.
Staying awake in any place during Prabodhiné pleases Lord Viñëu, what to speak of staying awake
in Lord Kåñëa's birth chamber in Mathurä.
Text 212
atha çré-keçavasya mähätmyam. ädi-värähe
pradakñiëé-kåtä tena
sapta-dvépä vasundharä
pradakñini-kåto yena
mathuräyäà tu keçavaù
atha-now; çré-keçavasya-of Lord Keçava; mähätmyam-glorification;. ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha

Puräëa; pradakñiëé-kåtä-circumambulated; tena-by him; sapta-dvépä-seven continents; vasundharä-
earth; pradakñini-kåtaù-circumambulated; yena-by whom; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tu-indeed;
keçavaù-Keçava.
The Glories of the Deity of Çré Keçava
A person who circumambulates the Deity of Çré Keçava in Mathura' circumambulates the the seven
continents of the earth.
Text 213
iha janma-kåtaà päpam

anya-janma-kåtaà ca yat
tat sarvaà naçyate çéghraà
kértane keçavasya ca
iha-here; janma-in this birth; kåtam-done; päpam-sin; anya-in another; janma-birth; kåtam-done; ca-
and; yat-what; tat-that; sarvam-all; naçyate-perishes; çéghram-quickly; kértane-in the glorification;
keçavasya-of Lord Keçava; ca-and.
Sins performed in this birth and other births are at once destroyed when one glorifies the Deity of
Lord Keçava.
Text 214
tatraiva suptotthita-keçavasya darçana-phalam
suptotthitaà harià dåñövä

mathuräyäà vasundhare
na tasya punar ävåttir
jäyate sa catur-bhujaù
tatra-there; eva-indeed; supta-utthita-risen from sleep; keçavasya-of Keçava; darçana-sight;

phalam'result; supta-utthitam-risen from sleep; harim-Lord Hari; dåñövä-having seen; mathuräyäm-in
Mathurä; vasundhare-O earth; na-not; tasya-of him; punar-again; ävåttir-return; jäyate-is born; sah-he;
catur-bhujaù-four-armed;
In the Same Scripture the Result of Seeing Lord Keçava Awaken From Sleep Is Described
O earth-goddess, a person who sees Lord Keçava awaken from sleep in Mathura' does not take birth
again in this world. He is born again as a four-armed resident of Vaikuëöha.
Text 215
pädme kärttika-mähätmye
suptam utthäpya govindaà

tan mukhaà sütikä-gåhe
paçyanti kåta-puëyä ye
teñäà kià bhägyam ucyate
pädme kärttika-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mahatmya; suptam-sleep; utthäpya-

awakening; govindam-Govinda; tat-that; mukham-face; sütikä-gåhe-in the birth-chamber; paçyanti-see;
kåta-puëyä-piety; ye-who; teñäm-of them; kim-how?; bhägyam-good fortune; ucyate-is said.
How can the good fortune of the pious persons who see Lord Govinda awaken from sleep in His
birth-chamber be described?
Text 216
viñëu-puräëe ñañöhe 'mçe
ürjasya çukla-dvädaçyäà
snätvä vai yamunä-jale
viñëu-puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; sasthe aàçe-in the Sixth Canto; ürjasya-of Kärttika; çukla-
dvädaçyäm-on çukla-dvädaçé; snätvä-having bathed; vai-indeed; yamunä-jale-in the Yamunä's water;
mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; harim-Lord Hari; dåñövä-having seen; präpnoti'attains; paramäm- gatim-the
supreme destination.
In the Viñëu Puräëa, Canto Six, it is said:
A person who on the çukla-dvädaçé of Kärttika bathes in the Yamunä's waters and then sees the
Deity of Lord Hari in Mathurä, attains the supreme destination.
Text 217
atha çré-bhagavan-mürténäà mähätmyam. ädi-värähe
dérgha-viñëuà samälokya
padmanäbhaà svayambhuvam
mathuräyäà sakåd devi
sarväbhéñöam aväpnuyät
atha-now; çré-bhagavat-of the Lord; mürténäm-of the Deities; mähätmyam-glorification; ädi-

värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; dérgha-viñëum-Dérgha Viñëu; samälokya-seeing; padmanäbham-
Padmanäbha; svayambhuvam-Svayambhü; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; sakåd'once; devi-O goddess;
sarva-all; abhiñöam-desires; aväpnuyät-attains.
Glorification of the Deity Forms of the Supreme Personality of Godhead
O goddess, a person who once sees the Deities of Lord Dérgha-Viñëu, Lord Padmanäbha, and Lord
Svayambhü, in Mathurä, attains all his desires.
Text 218
tathä
viçränti-saàjïakaà dåñövä
dérgha-viñëuà ca keçavam
sarveñäà darçanät puëyam
ebhir dåñöaiù phalaà labhet
tathä-so; viçränti-saàjïakam-named Viçränti; dåñövä-having seen; dérgha-viñëum-Dirgha Vis„ëu;

ca-and; keçavam-Keçava; sarveñäm-of all; darçanät-from the sight; puëyam-piety; ebhir-by them;
dåñöaiù-seen; phalam-result; labhet-attains.
It is also said:
They who see the Deities of Lord Dérgha-Viñëu and Lord Keçava at Viçränti-tértha attain the pious
result of seeing all other Deities.
Text 219
udaye mämakaà tejaù

sadä viçränti-saàjïake
madhyähne mämakaà tejo
dérgha-viñëau vyavasthitam
keçave mämakaà tejo
dina-bhäge caturthake
udaye-at sunrise; mämakam-My; tejaù-splendor; sadä-always; viçränti-saàjïake-at Viçränti;

madhyähne'at midday; mämakam-My; tejaù-splendor; dérgha-viñëau-in Dérgha Viñëu; vyavasthitam-
placed; keçave-in Keçava; mämakam-My; tejaù-splendor; dina-bhäge caturthake-at the fourth portion
of the day.
At sunrise My splendor rests in Viçränti-tértha. At midday My splendor rests in the Deity of Lord
Dérgha-Viñëu. In the evening My splendor rests in the Deity of Lord Keçava.
Text 220
atha çré-kåñëa-pariväräëäm
ekänaàçäà tato devéà

yaçodäà devakéà tadä
mahä-vidyeçvaréà dåñövä
mucyate brahma-hatyayä
atha-now; çré-kåñëa-pariväräëäm-of Lord Kåñëa's associates; ekänaàçäm-Ekanamsa-devi; tato-then;

devém-devi; yaçodäm-Yaçodä; devakém-Devaké; tadä-then; mahä-vidyeçvarém-Maha'-Vidyeçvaré;
dåñövä-having seen; mucyate-becomes free; brahma-hatyayä-from the sin opf killing a Brahmana.
The Glorification of Çré Kåñëa's Associates
A person who sees Ekänaàça'-devé, Yaçodä, Devaké, or Maha'-Vidyeçvaré-devé, becomes free

from the sin of killing a brähmaëa.
Text 221
atha bhüteçvarasya
mathuräyäà ca deva tvaà

kñetra-palo bhaviñyasi
tvayi dåñöe mahä-deva
mama kñetra-phalaà labhet
atha-now; bhüteçvarasya-of Lord Bhüteçvara; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ca-and; deva-O Lord; tvam-
you; kñetra-of the place; pälaù-protector; bhaviñyasi-are; tvayi-in you; dåñöe-seen; mahä-deva'O
Mahädeva; mama-My; kñetra-of the place;phalam-result; labhet-attains.
The Glorification of the Deity Lord Bhüteçvara (Çiva)
O Deva, you will be the protector of Mathurä. O Mahädeva, a person who sees you will attain the
result of seeing My own abode.
Text 222
nirväëa-khaëòe
yatra bhüteçvaro devo

mokñadaù päpinäm api
mama priyatamo nityaà
deva bhüteçvaraù paraù
nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirvän„-khaëòa; yatra-where; bhüteçvaraù-Bhutesvara; devaù-Lord;

mokñadaù-giver of liberation; päpinäm-of the sinful; api-even; mama-My; priyatamaù-most dear;
nityam-always; deva'O deva; bhüteçvaraù-Bhutesvara; paraù-supreme.
In Mathura' is the deity Lord Bhuteçvara, who grants liberation to even the sinful. This Bhuteçvara
deity is very dear to Me.
Text 223
kathaà vä mayi bhaktià sa

labhate päpa-püruñaù
yo madéyaà paraà bhaktaà
çivaà sampüjayen na hi
katham-how?; vä-or; mayi-for me; bhaktim-devotion; sah-he; labhate-attains; päpa-püruñaù'sinful

person; yaù-who; madéyam-My; param- bhaktam-supreme devotion; çivam-Çiva; sampüjayet'may
worship; na-not; hi-indeed.
How can a sinful person who tries to worship Me but will not worship Bhüteçvara Çiva attain
devotion to Me?
Text 224
man-mäyä-mohita-dhiyaù
präyas te mänavädhamäù
bhüteçvaraà na smaranti
na namanti stuvanti vä
mat-My; mäyä-Maya; mohita-bewildered; dhiyaù-intelligence; präyaù-mostly; te-they;

mänavädhamäù-the lowest of men; bhüteçvaram-Bhutesvara; na-not; smaranti-remember; na-not;
namanti-offer obeisances; stuvanti-offer prayers; vä-or.
The lowest of men, who are bewildered by My mäyä, will not meditate on, bow down before, and
offer prayers to Lord Bhüteçvara.
Text 225
atha viçränti-mähätmyam. skände
tatra térthaà mahäräja

viçränti-loka-viçrutam
bhramitvä sarva-térthäni
viçräntià yänti sattvatäù
atha-now; viçränti-of Viçränti; mähätmyam-glorification;. skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there;
tértham-holy place; mahäräja-O king; viçränti-Viçränti; loka-in the world; viçrutam-famous;
bhramitvä-having wandered; sarva-térthäni-to all holy places; viçräntim-to Viçränti-tértha; yänti-attain;
sattvatäù-the devotees.
The Glorification of Viçränti-tértha
In the Skanda Puräëa it is said:
O great king, this holy place is famous in the world as Viçränti-tértha. After traveling to all holy
places, the saintly devotees rest in Viçränti-tértha.
Text 226
tatraiva badaré-mähätmye
viçränti-térthe vidhivat
snätvä kåtvä tilodakam
pitån uddhåtya narakäd
viñëulokaà prapadyate
tatra-there; eva-indeed; badaré-of badari-tértha; mähätmye-in the glorification; viçränti-térthe-in

Viçränti-tértha; vidhivat-following the rules; snätvä-having bathed; kåtvä-having done; tila-sesame;
udakam-and water; pitån-to the pitäs; uddhåtya-lifting; narakäd-from hell; viñëulokam-Viñëuloks;
prapadyate-atain.
In the same scripture, in the Badaré-mähätmya, it is said:
A person who, following the rules of the scriptures, bathes at Viçränti-tértha and makes an offering
of sesame seeds and water, lifts his ancestors from hell and makes them enter Viñëuloka.
Text 227
yadi kuryät pramädena

pätakaà tatra mänaväù
viçränti-snäna-mätreëa
bhasmé-bhavati tat-kñaëät
yadi-if; kuryät-does; pramädena-out of foolishness; pätakam-sin; tatra-there; mänaväù-people;

viçränti-at Viçränti-tértha; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; bhasmé-bhavati-becomes ashes; tat-
kñaëät-at that moment.
If a person foolishly commits a sin, by his simply bathing at Viçränti-tértha the sin will be at once
burned to ashes.
Text 228
saura-puräëe
*tato viçränti-térthäkhyaà
tértham aìgho-vinäçanam
saàsära-maru-saïcära-
kleça-viçränti-daà nåëäm
saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; tataù-then; viçränti-térthäkhyam-Viçränti-tértha; tértham-holy

place; aìghaù-sins; vinäçanam-destruction; saàsära-of birth and death; maru-in the desert; saïcära-
wandering; kleça-suffering; viçränti-dam-giving rest; nåëäm-to people.
In the Saura Puräëa it is said:
The holy place named Viçränti-tértha destroys sins and gives rest from the pain of wandering in the
desert of birth and death.
Text 229
tatra térthe kåta-snäno

yo 'rcayed acyutaà naram
sa mukto bhava-santäpäd
amåtatväya kalpate
tatra-there; térthe-in the holy place; kåta-snänaù-bathed; yaù-one who; arcayed-worships; acyutam-
Lord Acyuta; naram-person; sah-he; muktaù-liberated; bhava-santäpäd-from the sufferings of material
existence; amåtatväya'for immortality; kalpate-becomes qualified.
A person who, bathing at this holy place, worships Lord Acyuta, becomes free from the sufferings
of repeated birth and death and qualified for liberation.
Text 230
pädme yamunä-mähätmye
kalinda-parvatodbhede
mathuräyäà tathä puré
pratyaì-mukhyaà ca çaukaryäà
bhägérathyäç ca saìgame
pädme yamunä-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Yamuna'-mahatmya; kalinda-parvata-udbhede-

from Mount Kalinda; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; tathä-so; puré-the city; pratyan--mukhyam-turning; ca-
and; çaukaryäm-to varäha-tértha; bhägérathyäù-with the Ganges; ca-and; saìgame-in meeting.
In the Padma Puräëa, Yamunä-mähätmya, it is said:
Flowing from Mount Kalinda to Mathura' City, and then west to Ädi-varäha-tértha, the Yamuna'
eventually meets the Ganges.
Text 231
phalaà uttara-küloktaà
tat-kälindyäà çatädhikamtad eva koöi-guëitaà
viçräntau kathyate budhaiù
phalam-result; uttara-küla-northern shore; uktam-said; tat-kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; çata-adhikam-

a hundred times greater; tad-that; eva-indeed; koöi-guëitam-millions of times more; viçräntau-at
Viçränti; kathyate-is said; budhaiù-by the wise.
The wise say the pious result of bathing in the Yamuna' is a hundred times greater on its northern
shore and millions of times greater at Viçränti-tértha.
Text 232
ädi-värähe
viçränti-saàjïakaà näma
térthaà trailokya-durlabham
yasmin snäto naro devi
mama loke mahéyate
ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; viçränti-saàjïakam- näma tértham-Viçränti-tértha; trailokya-in

the three worlds; durlabham-rare; yasmin-where; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess;
mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.
O goddess, a person who bathes in the holy place named Viçränti-tértha, which is difficult to attain
in the three worlds, is glorified in My own abode.
Text 233
gaìgä-çata-guëaà proktaà
yatra keçi-nipätitaù
keçyäù çata-guëaà proktaà
yatra viçräntito hariù
gaìgä-the Ganges; çata-guëam-multiplied 100 times; proktam- yatra-where; keçi-Keçé; nipätitaù-
died; keçyäù-than Kesi-tértha; çata-guëam-a hundred times more; proktam-said; yatra-where;
viçräntitaù-rested; hariù-Kåñëa.
The place where Keçé was killed is said to be a hundred times more sacred than the Ganges. The
place where Lord Hari rested is said to be a hundred times more sacred than Keçi-tértha.
Text 234
tathä
ardha-candräd viçeño 'sti

térthe viçränti-saàjïake
dähädi-karaëe tatra
gardhabho 'pi catur-bhüjaù
tathä-so; ardha-candräd-from Ardhacandra-tértha; viçeñaù-specific; asti-is; térthe viçränti-saàjïake-

in Viçränti-tértha; daha-ädi-beginning with a forest-fire; karaëe-cause; tatra-there; gardhabhaù-an ass;
api-even; catur-bhüjaù-four arms.
It is also said:
Near Ardhacandra-tértha is Viçränti-tértha, where there was a forest-fire and where an ass-demon
became a four-armed resident of Vaikuëöha.
Text 235
väsudevo vasen nityaà

tasmin sthäne nåpottama
viçräntià kurute yena
tena viçränti-saàjïakam
väsudevaù-Lord Väsudeva; vaset-lives; nityam-eternaly; tasmin sthäne-in that place; nåpottama'O

great king; viçräntim-rest; kurute-does; yena-by whom; tena-by Him; viçränti-saàjïakam-named
Viçränti-tértha.
O king, Lord Väsudeva resides eternally in this place. He rested (viçram, here and therefore this
place is named Viçränti-tértha.
Text 236
puräëäntare 'pi
kalpa-koöi-çatenäpi
viçräntau roma-romasu
kñaura-karmaëi dähe ca
punar-janma na vidyate
puräëa-antare-in another Puräëa; api-also; kalpa-koöi-çatena-hundreds of millions of kalpas; api-

even; viçräntau-in Viçränti; roma-romasu-in the hair; kñaura-karmaëi-shaving; dähe-in a fire; ca-and;
punar-janma-birth again; na-not; vidyate-is.
In another Puräëa it is said:

Shaving one's head at Viçränti-tértha is a great fire in which hundreds of millions of kalpas of future
births perish.
Text 237
atha gataçramadeva-mähätmyam. ädi-värähe
sarva-tértheñu yat snänaà

sarva-tértheñu yat phalam
dåñövä devaà gataçramam
atha-now; gataçramadeva-of Lord Gataçrama; mähätmyam-glorification; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-

varäha Puräëa; sarva-all; tértheñu-in holy places; yat-what; snänam-bath; sarva-tértheñu-in all holy
places; yat-what; phalam-result; tat-that; phalam-result; labhate-attains; devi-O goddess; dåñövä-
having seen; devam- gataçramam-Lord Gataçrama.
The Glorification of Gataçramadeva
O goddess, the pious result of bathing at all holy places is attained by seeing the Deity of Lord
Gataçrama.
Text 238
käla-trayaà tu vasudhe
yaù paçyati gataçramam
kåtvä pradakñiëaà bhéru
käla-trayam-three times; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; yaù-who; paçyati-sees; gataçramam-

Gataçrama; kåtvä pradakñiëam-circumambulating; bhéru-with reverence; viñëulokam-Viñëuloka; sah-
he; gacchati-goes.
O earth-goddess, a person who sees Lord Gataçrama three times (morning, noon, and night, a day
and circumambulates Him with awe and veneration, goes to Viñëuloka.
Text 239
athärdhacandra-sthitäni yamunä-térthäni catur-viàçatiù. ädi-värähe
avimukto naraù snätvä

muktià präpnoty asaàçayam
taträtha muïcati präëän
mama lokaà sa gacchaté
atha-now; ardhacandra-at Ardhacandra; sthitäni-situated; yamunä-on the Yamunä; térthäni-holy
places; catur-viàçatiù-24; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; avimuktaù-not liberated; naraù-a
person; snätvä-having bathed; muktim-liberation; präpnoti-attains; asaàçayam-no doubt; tatra-there;
atha-then; muïcati-gives up; präëän-life breath; mama-My; lokam-planet; sah-he; gacchati-goes.
Glorification of 24 Holy Places at Ardhacandra on the Yamunä's Shore
A person who bathes there attains liberation without doubt. A person who dies there goes to My
planet.
Text 240
viçränti-saàjïakaà näma
térthaà trailokya-viçrutam
yasmin snätvä naro devi
mama loke mahéyate
viçränti-saàjïakam- näma tértham-Viçränti-tértha; trailokya-viçrutam-famous in the three worlds;

yasmin-where; snätvä-having bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode;
This holy place is famous in the three worlds as Viçränti-tértha. O goddess, a person who bathes
here is glorified in My abode.
Text 241
asti cänyataraà guhyaà

sarva-saàsära-mokñaëam
tasmin snäto naro devi
mama loke mahéyate
asti-is; ca-and; anyataram-another; guhyam-Guhya; sarva-saàsära-mokñaëam-liberation from birth

and death; tasmin-there; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode;
Guhya-tértha, which gives liberation from the cycle of birth and death, is another holy place. O
goddess, a person who bathes there is glorified in My abode.
Text 242
prayägaà näma térthaà tu

devänäà api durlabham
yasmin snäto naro devi
agniñöoma-phalaà labhet
prayägam- näma tértham-Prayäga-tértha; tu-indeed; devänäm-for the demigods; api-even;

durlabham-difficult to attain; yasmin-where; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess;
agniñöoma-of an agnistoma-yajna; phalam-result; labhet-attains;
The holy place named Prayäga-tértha is difficult for even to the demigods to attain. O goddess, a
person who bathes there attains the result of performing an agniñöoma-yajïa.
Text 243
saura-puräëe
tatas térthaà prayägäkhyaà

pavitraà päpa-näçanam
pitåbhyas tatra yad dattaà
tad akñayataraà bhavet
saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; tataù-then; tértham- prayägäkhyam-Prayäga-tértha; pavitram-

pure; päpa-näçanam-destroying sin; pitåbhyaù-to the pitäs; tatra-there; yad-what; dattam-offered; tad-
that;û akñayataram-immortality; bhavet-is.
Next is the holy place named Prayäga-tértha, which destroys sins and is very pure. Ancestors who
receive offerings there become immortal.
Text 244
tat térthaà sevamänasya

kåñëaà ca jagatäà gurum
niùsaàçayaà manuñyasya
na punar-janma-sambhavaù
tat tértham-that holy place; sevamänasya-of a servant; kåñëam-Lord Kåñëa; ca-and; jagatäm-
gurum-master of the universes; niùsaàçayam-without doubt; manuñyasya-of a person; na-not; punar-
janma-sambhavaù-re-birth.
A person who serves both this holy place and Lord Kåñëa, the master of the universes, never takes
birth again. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 245
ädi-värähe
tathä kanakhalaà térthaà

guhyaà térthaà paraà mama
snäna-mätreëa taträpi
näka-påñöhe sa modate
ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tathä-then; kanakhalam- tértham-Kanakhala-tértha; guhyam-

secret; tértham-holy place; param-transcendental; mama-My; snäna-mätreëa'simply by bathing; tatra-
there;pi näka-påñöhe-in the spiritual sky; sah-he; modate-enjoys.
Next is My secret holy place Kanakhala-tértha. A person who once bathes there enjoys in the
spiritual sky.
Text 246
asti kñetraà paraà guhyaà

tindukaà näma nämataù
tasmin snätvä naro devi
mama loke mahéyate
asti-is; kñetram-place; param-great; guhyam-secret; tindukam- näma-named Tinduka-tértha;

nämataù-from the name; tasmin-there; snätvä-having bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-
My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.
Next is the secret holy place named Tinduka-tértha. O goddess, a person who bathes there become
glorified in My abode.
Text 247
tataù paraà sürya-térthaà

sarva-päpa-pranäçanam
vairocanena balinä
süryas tö ärädhitaù purä
tataù param-next; sürya-tértham-Sürya-tértha; sarva-päpa-pranäçanam-destroying all sins;

vairocanena-Virocana's son; balinä-by Bali; süryaù-the sun-god; tu-indeed; ärädhitaù-worshiped; purä-
long ago.
Next is Surya-tértha, which destroys all sins. Long ago Virocana's son Bali worshiped the son-god
there.
Text 248
ädityo 'hani saìkräntaü grahaëe candra-süryayoù

tasmin snäto naro devi
räjasuya-phalaà labhet
ädityaù-the sun-god; ahani saìkräntau-on Sankranti day; grahaëe-on an eclipse; candra-of the moon;
süryayoù-or the sun; tasmin-there; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; räjasuya-of a
rajasuya sacrifice; phalam-result; labhet-attains;
O goddess, a person who bathes there on the Äditya-saìkränti day, or on a solar or lunar eclipse,
attains the result of performing a Räjasüya-yajïa.
Text 249
saura-puräëe
tataù paraà vaöa-svämé

térthänäà tértham uttamam
vaöa-svämiöi vikhyäto
yatra devo diväkaraù
saura-puräëe-in the saura Puräëa; tataù param-next; vaöa-svämé-Vatasvami; térthänäm- tértham

uttamam'the best of holy places; vaöa-svämiöi-Vatasvami; vikhyätaù-famous; yatra-where; devaù-
deity; diväkaraù-the sun-god.
Next is Vaöasvämi-tértha, the best of all hoiy places. The deity of the sun-god there is famous as
Lord Vaöasvämé.
Text 250
tat térthaà caiva yo bhaktyä

ravi-väre niñevate
präpnoty arogyam aiçvaryam
ante ca gatim uttamäm
tat-that; tértham-holy place; ca-and; eva-indeed; yaù-who; bhaktyä-with devotion; ravi-väre-on

Sunday; niñevate-serves; präpnoti-attains» arogyam-health; aiçvaryam-wealth; ante-at the end; ca-and;
gatim-destination; uttamäm-supreme.
A person who on Sunday serves this holy place with devotion attains good health, wealth, and, at
the end, the supreme destination.
Text 251
ädi-värähe
yatra dhruvena santaptam
icchayä paramaà tapaù
tatra vai snäna-mätreëa
dhruvaloke mahéyate
ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; yatra-where; dhruvena-by Dhruva; santaptam-austerities;

icchayä-with a desire; paramam-supreme; tapaù-austerity; tatra-there; vai snäna-mätreëa-simply by
bathing; dhruvaloke-on Dhruvaloka; mahéyate-glorified.
In the Ädi-väräha Puräëa it is said:
Simply by bathing there (in Dhruva-tértha, where Dhruva Mahäräja earnestly performed servere
austerities, a person becomes glorified on Dhruvaloka.
Text 252
dhruva-térthe tu vasudhe
yaù çräddhaà kurute naraù
pitån santärayate sarvän
pitå-pakñe viçeñataù
dhruva-térthe-at Dhruva-tértha; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; yaù-who; çräddham-sraddha; kurute-

does; naraù-a person; pitån-to the pitäs; santärayate-delivers; sarvän-all; pitr„-pakñe-in the pitäs;
viçeñataù-specifically.
O earth-goddess, a person who performs çräddha at Dhruva-tértha delivers all his ancestors.
Text 253
saura-puräëe
dhruva-térthaà iti khyätaà

térthaà mukhyaà tataù param
yatra snänavato mokño
dhruva eva na saàçayaù
saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; dhruva-tértham-Dhruva-tértha; iti-thus; khyätam-known; tértham-

holy place; mukhyam-best; tataù param-then; yatra-where; snänavataù-from bathing; mokñaù-
liberation; dhruva-indeed; eva-indeed; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.
Famous Dhruva-tértha is the best of holy places. Simply by bathing there one becomes liberated. Of
this there is no doubt.
Text 254
gayäyäà piëòa-dänena
yat phalaà hi nåëäà bhavet
tasmä chata-guëaà térthe
piëòa-dänäd dhruvasya ca
skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; gayäyäm-at Gayä; piëòa-of piëòa;
dänena'by offering; yat-what; phalam-result; hi-indeed; nåëäm-of people; bhavet'may be; tasmä-than
that; chata-guëam-a hundred times more; térthe-at the holy place; piëòa-dänäd-than offering of piëòa;
dhruvasya-of Dhruva; ca-and.
The result of offering piëòa at Dhruva-tértha is hundreds of times more than piëòa offered at Gaya.
Text 255
dhruva-térthe japo homas

tapo dänaà surärcanam
sarva-térthä chata-guëaà
nåëäà tatra phalaà labhet
dhruva-térthe-at Dhruva-tértha; japaù-japa; homaùsacrifice; tapaù-austerity; dänam-charity; sura-of

the demigods; arcanam-worship; sarva-térthac-than all holy places; chata-guëam-a hundred times
more; nåëäm-of people; tatra-there; phalam-result; labhet-attains;
Mantras, agnihotra-yajïas, austerities, charity, and worship of the demigods are hundreds of times
more fruitful at Dhruva-tértha than at all other holy places.
Text 256
ädi-värähe puräëe
dakñiëe dhruva-térthasya
åñi-térthaà prakértitam
tatra snäto naro devi
mama loke mahéyate
ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; puräëe-in the Puräëa; dakñiëe-south; dhruva-térthasya-of

Dhruva-tértha; åñi-tértham-Rçi-tértha; prakértitam-glorified; tatra-there; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person;
devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.
South of Dhruva-tértha is famous Rñi-tértha. O goddess, a person who bathes there becomes
Text 257
tasmin madhuvane puëyaà

åñi-térthaà hareù priyam
snäna-mätreëa bhü-päla
harau bhaktiù parä bhavet
skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tasmin-there; madhuvane-in

Madhuvana; puëyam-sacred; åñi-tértham-Rñi-tértha; hareù-to Lord Hari; priyam-dear; snäna-mätreëa-
simply by bathing; bhü-päla-O king; harau-for Lord Hari; bhaktiù-devotion; parä-transcendental;
bhavet-is.
In Madhuvana is sacred Rñi-tértha, which is dear to Lord Hari. O king, simply by bathing there one
attains transcendental devotional service to Lord Hari.
Text 258
dakñiëe åñi-térthasya
mokña-térthaà vasundhare
snäna-mätreëa vasudhe
moksaà präpnoti mänavaù
dakñiëe-in the south; åñi-térthasya-of rsi-tértha; mokña-tértham-Moksa-tértha; vasundhare-O earth;

snäna-mätreëa'simply by bathing; vasudhe-O earth; moksam-liberation; präpnoti-attains; mänavaù-a
person.
O earth-goddess, south of Rsi-tértha is Mokña-tértha. O earth-goddess, simply by bathing there a

person attains liberation.
Text 259
ädi-värähe
tatraiva koöi-térthaà tu
devänäm api durlabhamtatra snänena dänena
mama loke mahéyate
ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tatra-there; eva-indeed; koöi-tértham-Koti-tértha; tu-indeed;

devänäm-for the demigods; api-even; durlabham-difficult to attain; tatra-there; snänena-by âathing;
dänena-by giving charity; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.
This is Koöi-tértha, which even the demigods cannot attain. Simply by bathing here or giving
charity here a person becomes glorified in My abode.
Text 260
tatraiva bodhi-térthaà hi
pitånäm ati-durlabham
piëòän dattvä tu vasudhe
pitålokaà sa gacchati
tatra-there; eva-indeed; bodhi-tértham-Bodhi-tértha; hi-indeed; pitånäm-for the pitäs; ati-

durlabham'very difficult to attain; piëòän-piëòa; dattvä-offering; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth;
pitålokam-to Pitrloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.
This is Bodhi-tértha, which even the pitäs cannot attain. O earth-goddess, simply by offering piëòa
here a person goes to Pitåloka.
Text 261
dvädaçaitäni térthäni
devänäà durlabhäni ca
teñäà smaraëa-mätreëa
dvädaça-12; etäni-these; térthäni-holy places; devänäm-for the demigods; durlabhäni-difficult to

attain; ca-and; teñäm-of them;û smaraëa-mätreëa-simply by remembering; sarva-päpaiù-from all sins;
pramucyate-becomes free.
Even the demigods cannot attain these twelve holy places. Simply by remembering these holy
places one becomes free from all sins.
Text 262
uttare tö asi-kuëòasya
térthaà tu nara-saàjïakam
nara-térthät paraà térthaà
na bhütaà na bhaviñyati
uttare-in the north; tu-certainly; asi-kuëòasya-of Asi-kuëòa; tértham-holy place; tu-indeed; nara-
saàjïakam-named Nara-tértha; nara-térthät'Nara-tértha; param-after; tértham-holy place; na-not;
bhütam-was; na-not; bhaviñyati-will be.
North of Asi-kuëòa is Nara-tértha. No holy place is, or ever will be, better than Nara-tértha.
Text 263
tataù samyamanaà näma

térthaà trailokya-viçrutam
tatra snäto naro devi
mama lokaà sa gacchati
tataù-next; samyamanam- näma tértham-named Samyamana-tértha; trailokya-viçrutam-famous in

the three worlds; tatra-there; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; lokam-planet;
Next is Samyamana-tértha, which is famous in the three worlds. O goddess, a person who bathes
there goes to My abode.
Text 264
dhärä-patanake snätvä
athätra muïcate präëän
dhärä-patanake-at Dharapatanaka-tértha; snätvä-having bathed; näka-påñöhe-in the spiritual sky;

sah-he; modate-enjoys; atha-then; atra-here; muïcate'giving up; präëän-life; mama-My; lokam-planet;
A person who bathes at Dhäräpatanaka-tértha enjoys in the spiritual sky. A person who dies here
goes to My abode.
Text 265
ataù paraà näga-térthaà

térthänäm uttamottamam
yatra snätvä divaà yänti
ye måtäs te 'punar-bhavaù
ataù param-next; näga-tértham-Näga-tértha; térthänäm uttama-uttamam-the very best of holy places;
yatra-where; snätvä-having bathed; divam-the spiritual world; yänti-attain; ye-who; måtäù te-they;
apunar-bhavaù-no birth again.
Next is Näga-tértha, the best of holy places. They who bathe there go to the spiritual world. When
they die they do not return to the world of birth and death.
Text 266
ghaëöäbharaëakaà térthaà
sarva-päpa-pramocanam
yatra snäto naro devi
süryaloke mahéyate
ghaëöäbharaëakam- tértham-Ghantabhara-tértha; sarva-päpa-pramocanam-freeing from all sins;

yatra-where; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; süryaloke-on Süryaloka; mahéyate-
glorified.
Next is Ghaëöäbharaëa-tértha, which removes all sins. O goddess, a person who bathes there
becomes glorified on the sun-planet.
Text 267
térthänäm uttamaà térthaà

brahmaloketi viçrutam
tatra snätvä ca pétvä ca
samyato niyatäçanaù
brahmaëä samanujïäto
térthänäm uttamam- tértham-the ultimate holy place; brahmaloka-Brahmaloka; iti-thus; viçrutam-

famous; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; ca-and; pétvä-having drunk; ca-and; samyataù-controlling
the senses; niyatäçanaù-fasting; brahmaëä-by Brahmä; samanujïätaù-blessed; viñëulokam-to
Viñëuloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.
Next is Brahmaloka-tértha, the best of holy places. A person who bathes there, drinks its water,
fasts, and controls his senses, attains Lord Brahmä's blessings and goes to Viñëuloka.
Text 268
soma-térthe tu vasudhe
pavitre yamunämbhasétatrabhiñekaà kurvéta
sva-sva-karma-pratiñöhitaù
modate somaloke tu
sa eva nätra saàçayaù
soma-térthe-at Soma-tértha; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; pavitre-pure; yamunä-ambhasi-in the

Yamuna' water; tatra-there; abhiñekam-bath; kurvéta-does; sva-sva-karma-pratiñöhitaù-properly
performing prescribed duties; modate-enjoys; somaloke-on Somaloka; tu-indeed; sah-this; eva-indeed;
na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.
O earth-goddess, a person who properly performs his prescribed duties and bathes in the waters of
the Yamunä at Soma-tértha, enjoys in the moon-planet. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 269
sarasvatyäç ca patanaà
sarva-päpa-haraà çubham
tatra snätvä naro devi
avarëo 'pi yatir bhavet
sarasvatyäs" ca patanam-Sarasvatipatana-tértha; sarva-päpa-haram-removing all sins; çubham-

sacred; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; avarëaù-a person of the
lowest class; api-even; yatir-a sannyasi; bhavet-becomes.
Next is sacred Sarasvatépatana-tértha, which removes all sins. O goddess, if a man of even the
lowest class bathes there, he becomes a sannyäsé.
Text 270
cakratérthaà tu vikhyätaà
mäthure mama maëòale
yas tatra kurute snänaà
tri-rätropoñito naraù
snäna-mätreëa manujo
mucyate brahma-hatyayä
cakratértham-Cakratértha; tu-indeed; vikhyätam-famous; mäthure-in Mathurä; mama-My; maëòale-

circle; yaù-who; tatra-there; kurute snänam-bathes; tri-rätra-for three nights; upoñitaù-fasting; naraù-a
person; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; manujaù-a person; mucyate-free; brahma-hatyayä-from the
sin of killing a brähmaëa.
Cakra-tértha is famous in My circle of Mathurä. A person who, fasting there for three nights, bathes
there, simply by that bath becomes free from the sin of killing a brähmaëa.
Text 271
daçäçvamedham åñibhiù
püjitaà sarvadä purä
tatra ye snänti niyatäs
teñäà svargo na durlabhaù
daçäçvamedham-Dasasvamedha; åñibhiù-by the sages; püjitam-worshiped; sarvadä-always; purä-

formerly; tatra-there; ye-who; snänti-bathe; niyatäùcontrolling the senses; teñäm-of them; svargaù-
Svargaloka; na-not; durlabhaù-difficult to attain.
Daçäçvamedha-tértha is always worshiped by the great sages. For self-controlled persons who bathe
there Svargaloka is not difficult to attain.
Text 272
térthaà tu vighnaräjasya
puëyaà päpa-haraà çubham
tatra snätaà ca manujaà
vighna-räjo na péòayet
tértham-tértha; tu-indeed; vighnaräjasya-of Vighnaraja; puëyam-sacred; päpa-haram-removing sin;

çubham-auspicious; tatra-there; snätam- ca-and; manujam-a person; vighna-räjaù-Vighnaräja; na-not;
péòayet-troubles.
Sacred and auspicious Vighnaräja-tértha removes sins. Vighnaräja will not trouble a person who has
bathed there.
Text 273
tataç ca koti-térthaà tu
pavitraà paramaà çubham
tatraiva snäna-mätreëa
koöi-godänajaà phalam
tataù-next; ca-and; koti-tértham-Koti-tértha; tu-indeed; pavitram-pure; paramam-sacred; çubham-

auspicious; tatra-there; eva-indeed; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; koöi-millions; godänajam-of
giving cows; phalam-result.
Next is sacred and auspicious Koöi-tértha. By bathing there one attains the result of offering
millions of cows in charity.
Text 274
mathurä-khaëòa-mate tu viçrantià vina caturviàçatitvam. tathä hi
mathurä-khaëòa-mate-the opion of Mathura'-khaëòa; tu-indeed; viçrantim-Viçränti-tértha; vina-

except; caturviàçatitvam-24; tathä hi-furthermore.
Without considering Viçranti-tértha, 24 holy places are described in the Mathura-khaëòa in the
following words.
Text 275
catur-viàçati-térthäni
tat-térthäd dakñiëottare
daçäçvamedha-paryantaà
mokñäntaà ca yudhiñöhira
catur-viàçati-24; térthäni-holy places; tat-térthäd-of that holy place; dakñiëa-south; uttare-and north;
daçäçvamedha-Dasasvamedha; paryantam-until; mokña-Mokña-tértha; antam-at the end;û ca-and;
yudhiñöhira-O Yudhiñöhira.
O Yudhiñöhira, beginning with Daçäçvamedha-tértha, and culminating in Mokña-tértha, there are

24 holy places north and south of that holy place.
Text 276
athätratya-parama-prasiddha-térthanaà mähätmyam. atra gokarëasya yathä saura-puräëe
tato gokarëa-térthäkhyaà
térthaà tri-bhuvana-çrutam
vidyate viçvanäthasya
viñëor atyanta-vallabham
atha-then; ätratya-there; parama-prasiddha-térthanam-of very famous holy places; mähätmyam-

glorification; atra-here; gokarëasya-of Gokarëa; yathä-as; saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; tataù-then;
gokarëa-térthäkhyam- tértham-Gokarëa-tértha; tri-bhuvana-çrutam-famous in the three worlds; vidyate-
is; viçvanäthasya-the master of the universes; viñëor'of Lord Viñëu; atyanta-very; vallabham-dear.
Glorification of of the Famous Holy Places There
Glorification of Gokarëa-tértha
In the Saura Puräëa iti is said:

Next is the holy place named Gokarëa-tértha, which is famous in the three worlds and very dear to
Lord Viñëu, the master of the universes.
Text 277
kåñëa-gaìgäyäù. ädi-värähe
païca-térthabhiñekä ca
yat phalaà labhate naraù
kåñëa-gaìgä daça-guëaà
diçate tu dine dine
kåñëa-gaìgäyäù-of the Kåñëa-gaìgä; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; païca-five; tértha-holy

places; abhiñekä-because of bathing; ca-and; yat-what; phalam-result; labhate-obtains; naraù kåñëa-
gaìgä-Kåñëa-gaìgä; daça-guëam-ten times more; diçate-shows; tu-indeed; dine dine-every day.
Glorification of Kåñëa-gaìgä
The pious result a person attains by bathing at five holy places is attained, multiplied by ten, every
day at Kåñëa-gaìgä.
Text 278
vaikuëöha-térthasya
vaikuëöha-térthe yaù snäti

sarva-päpa-vinirmukto
brahmalokaà sa gacchati
vaikuëöha-térthasya-of Vaikuëöha-tértha; vaikuëöha-térthe-at Vaikuëöha-tértha; yaù-one who;

snäti-bathes; mucyate-is freed; sarva-pätakaiù-from all sins; sarva-päpa-vinirmuktaù-freed from all
sins; brahmalokam-to Brahmaloka; saù-he; gacchati-goes.
Glorification of Vaikuëöha-tértha
A person who bathes at Vaikuëöha-tértha becomes free from all sins. Free from all sins, he goes to
the spiritual world.
Text 279-280
asi-kuëòasya
ekä varäha-saàjïä ca
tathä näräyaëé parä
vämanä ca tåtéyä vai
caturthé laìgalé çubhä
etäç catasro yaù paçyet
snätvä kuëòe 'si-saàjïake
catuù-sägara-paryantä
kräntä tena dharä dhruvam
térthänäà mathuränäà ca
sarveñäà phalam açnute
asi-kuëòasya-of Asi-kuëòa; ekä-one; varäha-saàjïä-named Varäha; ca-and; tathä-then; näräyaëé-

Näräyaëa; parä-great; vämanä-Vämana; ca-and; tåtéyä-third; vai-indeed; caturthé-fourth; laìgalé-
Balaräma; çubhäh-auspicious; etäù-these; catasraù-four; yaù-who; paçyet-may see; snätvä-having
bathed; kuëòe asi-saàjïake-in Asi-kuëòa; catuù-sägara-paryantä kräntä-up to the four oceans; tena-by
him; dharä-the earth; dhruvam-indeed; térthänäm-of holy places; mathuränäm-of Mathurä; ca-and;
sarveñäm-of all; phalam-the result; açnute-enjoys.
Glorification of of Asi-kuëòa
First is Varäha. Then is Näräyaëa. Third is Vämana. Fourth is Balaräma. A person who sees these
four Deities and bathes in Asi-kuëòa attains the result of visiting all holy places in Mathura' and all
other holy places within the boundaries of the world's four seas.
Text 281
atha kälindé-mähätmyam. ädi-värähe
gaìgä çata-guëä proktä

mäthure mama maëòale
yamunä viçrutä devi
nätra käryä vicaraëä
atha-now; kälindé-of the Yamunä; mähätmyam-glorification;. ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa;

gaìgä-the Ganges; çata-guëä-a hundred times more; proktä-said; mäthure-in Mathurä; mama-My;
maëòale-circle; yamunä-Yamunä; viçrutä-famous; devi-O goddess; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done;
vicaraëä-doubt.
Glorification of the Yamunä
O goddess, the Yamunä in My circle of Mathura' is a hundred times more sacred than the Ganges.
Of this there is no doubt.
Text 282
tatra térthäni guhyäni

bhaviñyanti mamänaghe
yeñu snäto naro devi
mama loke mahéyate
tatra-there; térthäni-holy places; guhyäni-secret; bhaviñyanti-will be; mama-My; anaghe-O sinless

one; yeñu-in which; snätaù-bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode;
O sinless one, in the Yamunä will be many secret places sacred to Me. O goddess, a person who
bathes in them is glorified in My abode.
Text 283
yamunä-salile snätaù
çucir bhütvä jitendriyaù
samäbhyarcyäcyutaà samyäk
yamunä-salile-in the Ymaunä's waters; snätaù-bathed; çucir-pure; bhütvä-becoming; jita-conquered;

indriyaù-senses; samäbhyarcya-having worshiped; acyutam-Lord Acyuta; samyäk-completely;
präpnoti-attains; paramäm- gatim-the supreme destination.
A person who bathes in the Yamunä's waters becomes pure and sense-controlled. He worships Lord
Acyuta and attains the supreme destination.
Text 284
värähe
nadé tatra varärohe

çubha puëyojjvalodakä
vivasvataù sutä puëyä
yamunä vai bhaviñyati
värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; nadé-river; tatra-there; varärohe-O beautiful one; çubha-auspicious;
puëya-pure; ujjvala-splendid; udakä-waters; vivasvataù-of the sun-god; sutä-the daughter; puëyä-
saintly; yamunä-Yamunä; vai-indeed; bhaviñyati-will be.
O beautiful girl, in this place will be the Yamunä, the auspicious, pure, and splendid river that is the
saintly daughter of the sun-god.
Text 285
sä prayäge tu suçroni
brahma-kñetre mahä-yaçaù
sameñyati na sandeho
gaìgäyäs tad anantaram
sä-she; prayäge-at Prayäga; tu-indeed; suçroni-O beautiful girl; brahma-kñetre-in Brahma-kñetra;

mahä-great; yaçaù-fame; sameñyati-will meet; na-not; sandehaù-doubt; gaìgäyaù-the Ganges; tad
anantaram-after.
O beautiful girl, this glorious river will meet the Ganges at Prayäga in Brahma-kñetra. Of this there
is no doubt.
Text 286
mätsye yudhiñöhira-närada-samväde
tatra snätvä ca pétvä ca

yamunäyäà yudhiñöhira
kértanäl labhate puëyaà
dåñövä bhadräëi paçyati
mätsye-in the Matsya Puräëa; yudhiñöhira-närada-samväde-in the conversation of Närada and

Yudhiñöhira; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; ca-and; pétvä-having drunk; ca-and; yamunäyäm-in the
Yamunä; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhiñöhira; kértanäl-from the glorification; labhate-attains; puëyam-piety;
dåñövä-having seen; bhadräëi-auspiciousness; paçyati-sees.
In the Matsya Puräëa, in the conversation of Yudhiñöhira and Närada, it is said:
O Yudhiñöhira, a person who bathes in the Yamunä, glorifies it, and drinks its waters, attains piety.
He sees auspiciousness.
Text 287
avagähya ca pétvä ca
punäty asaptamaà kulam
präëäàs tyajati yas tatra
sa yäti paramäà gatim
avagähya-plunging; ca-and; pétvä-drinking; ca-and; punäti-purifies; ä-saptamam-up to seven;

kulam-family; präëän-life breathl; tyajati-abandond» yaù-one who; tatra-there; sah-he; yäti-goes;
paramäm- gatim-to the supreme destination.
A person who enters the Yamunä and drinks its waters purifies seven generations of ancestors. A
person who dies in the Yamunä goes to the supreme destination.
Text 288
viñëu-dharmottare
yatra kvacana kälindyäà

kåtvä çräddhaà narädhipa
akñayaà phalam äpnoti
viñëu-dharma-uttare-in the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa; yatra-where; kvacana-somewhere;

kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; kåtvä-having done; çräddham-sraddha; narädhipa-O king; akñayam-eternal;
phalam-result; äpnoti-attains; näka-påñöhe-in the spiritual sky; sah-he; modate-enjoys.
In the Viñëu-dharma Puräëa, Uttara-khaëòa, it is said:
O king, a person who offers çräddha by the Yamunä attains an eternal result. He enjoys in the
spiritual sky.
Text 289
padma-puräëe pätäla-khaëòe
raso yaù paramädhäraù

sac-cid-änanda-lakñaëaù
brahmety-upaniñad-gétaù
sa eva yamunä svayam
pävanäyäsya jagataù
sarid bhütvä sasära ha
padma-puräëe pätäla-khaëòe-in the Padma Puräëa, Patala-khaëòa; rasaù-nectar; yaù-which;

paramädhäraù-supreme river; sac-eternal; cid-spiritual;änanda-blissful; lakñaëaù-characteristics;
brahma-Brahman; iti-thus; upaniñad-in the Upaniñads; gétaù-called; sa-that; eva-indeed; yamunä-
Yamunä; svayam-personally; pävanäya-to purify; asya-of this; jagataù-universe; sarid-a river; bhütvä-
having become;û sasära ha-flowed.
The flood of eternal, blissful spiritual nectar, which is called Brahman in the Upaniñads, is the
Yamunä, which has become a flowing river to purify the worlds.
Text 290
tathä
pätaké pätakän muktaù

puëyäòhyaù syäd apätaké
phaläbhisandhi-rahitaù
kälindyäm eva mucyate
tathä-then; pätaké-sinful; pätakät-fropm sin; muktaù-free; puëyäòhyaù-pious; syäd-becomes;

apätaké'sinless; phala-abhisandhi-rahitaù-free from sinful reaction; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; eva-
indeed; mucyate-is liberated.
By the Yamunä's touch a sinful person becomes free from sin, pious and saintly. Free from past
sinful reactions, he becomes liberated.
Text 291
snänädi-karma kälindyäà
yena kenäpi yat kåtam
yathävad ayathävad vä
tat sädhu phalavad bhavet
snäna-bathing; ädi-beginning with; karma-action; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; yena kenäpi-by

someone; yat-which; kåtam-done; yathävad-properly; ayathävad-improperly; vä-or; tat-that; sädhu-
sacred; phalavad-result; bhavet-is.
Whether one bathes or worships the Yamunä properly or improperly he will attain the sacred result.
Text 292
viçeña eva kälindyäà

måte yati hareù padam
mathurä-saìgatayaà tu
harir eva bhaven naraù
viçeñah-specifically; eva-indeed; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; måte-dead; yati-attains; hareù-of Lord

Hari; padam-the feet; mathurä-saìgatayam-in Mathurä; tu-indeed; harir-Lord Hari; eva-indeed; bhavet-
becomes; naraù-person.
A person who dies in the Yamunä goes to the abode of Lord Hari. A person who dies in the Yamunä
as it flows through Mathura' attains a spiritual form like that of Lord Hari.
Text 293
tatraiva hara-gauri-samväde
brahma-jïänena mucyante
käçyäà ca maraëe naraù
athavä snäna-mätreëa
kåñëäyäà kåñëa-sannidhau
tatra-there; eva-indeed; hara-gauri-samväde-in the conversation of Çiva and Gauré; brahma-jïänena-

with spiritual knowledge; mucyante-are free; käçyäm-in Väräëasé; ca-and; maraëe-in death; naraù-a
person; athavä-or; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; kåñëäyäm-in the Yamunä; kåñëa-sannidhau-near
Kåñëa.
In the same scripture, in the conversation between Çiva and Gauré, it is said:
By attaining spiritual knowledge, they who die at Väräëasé become liberated. On the other hand,
simply by bathing in the Yamunä, the devotees attain the association of Lord Kåñëa.
Text 294
yamunä-jala-kallole
kréòate devaké-sutaù
tatra snätvä mahä-devi
sarva-tértha-phalaà labhet
yamunä-jala-kallole-in the Yamunä's waves;; kréòate'plays; devaké-sutaù-Devaké's son; tatra-there;

snätvä-having bathed; mahä-devi-O goddess; sarva-tértha-of all holy places; phalam-result; labhet-
attains.
Devaké's son plays in the Yamunä's waves. O great goddess, a person who bathes there attains the
result of visiting all holy places.
Text 295
aho abhägyaà lokasya

na pétaà yamunä-jalam
go-gopa-gopikä-saìge
yatra kréòati kaàsa-hä
ahaù-Oh; abhägyam-misofrtune; lokasya-of the people; na-not; pétam-drunk; yamunä-jalam-
Yamuna' water; gaù-cows; gopa-gopas; gopikä-gopés; saìge-in company; yatra-where; kréòati-plays;
kaàsa-hä-Kåñëa.
Oh the misfortune of they who have not drunk the Yamunä's waters, where the killer of Kaàsa plays
with the cows, gopas, and gopés!
Text 296
cid-änandamayé säkñäd
yamunä yama-bhéti-nut
tatra-there; eva-indeed; nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirvana-khaëòa; cid-änandamayé-full of spiritual

bliss; säkñäd-directly; yamunä-Yamunä; yama-of Yama;; bhéti-the fear; nut-removing.
The spiritual, blisssful Yamunä removes the fear of Yamaräja.
Text 297
käla-viçeñe tatra snänädi-phalam. ädi-värähe
samabhyarcya janärdanam
dhanyo 'sau piëòa-nirväpaà
yamunäyäà kariñyati
käla-time; viçeñe-specific; tatra-there; snäna-bathing; ädi-beginning with; phalam-result; ädi-

värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; jyaiñöhasya-of Jyaistha; çukla-dvädaçyäm-in the çukla-dvädaçé;
samabhyarcya-having worshiped; janärdanam-Janärdana; dhanyaù-fortunate; .asau-he; piëòa-
nirväpam-offering piëòa; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; kariñyati-will do.
The Result of Bathing and Other Devotional Activities Performed There at Certain Specifé Times
A person who during the çukla-ekädaçé of the month of Jyaiñöha (May-June, worships Lord
Janärdana by the Yamunä's shore, becomes fortunate and attains the result of offering piëòa.
Text 298-299
çri-viñëu puräëe
yamunä-salile snätaù
puruño muni-sattamäjyaiñöha-müle 'male pakñe
dvädaçyäm upaväsa-kåt
samabhyarcyäcyutaà samyäg
yamunäyäà samähitaù
açvamedhasya yajïasya
präpnoty adhikajaà phalam
çri-viñëu puräëe-in the Viñëu Puräëa; yamunä-salile-in the Yamunä's water;; snätaù-bathed;
puruñaù-a person; muni-sattama-O great sage; jyaiñöha-müle-in the star Mula in month of Jyaistha;
amale pakñe dvädaçyäm'in the çukla-dvädaçé; upaväsa-kåt-fasting; samabhyarcya-having worshiped;
acyutam-Lord Acyuta; samyäk-completely; yamunäyäm- samähitaù-in the Yamunä; açvamedhasya
yajïasya-of an asvamedha sacrifice; präpnoti-attains» adhikajam-greater; phalam-result.
In the Çré Viñëu Puräëa it is said:
O great sage, a person who, fasting, bathes in the Yamunä's waters during the Müla'-nakñatra in the
çukla-dvädaçé of the month of Jyaiñöha, and then with a peaceful heart worships Lord Acyuta on the
Yamunä's shore, attains a result greater than the result of an açvamedha-yajïa.
Text 300-301
tatraiva pitåëäà väkyam
kaçcid asmat-kule jätaù

kälindé-saliläplutaù
arcayiñyati govindaà
mathuräyäm upoñitaù
jyaiñöha-müle 'male pakñe

yenaiva vayam apy uta
paräm åddhim aväpa syämas
täritäù sva-kulodbhavaiù
tatra-there; eva-indeed; pitåëäm-of pitäs; väkyam-statement; kaçcid-someone; asmat-kule-in our

family; jätaù-born; kälindé-of the Yamunä; salila-in the water; äplutaù-bathed; arcayiñyati-will
worship; govindam-Lord Govinda; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä» upoñitaù-fasting; jyaiñöha-müle-in the
month of Jyaistha during the star Mula; amale pakñe-in the bright half; yena-by whom; eva-indeed;
vayam-we; api-also; uta-indeed; paräm-supreme; åddhim-opulence; aväpa-attained; syämaùare täritäù-
delivered; sva-kulodbhavaiù-with our relatives.
In the same scripture, the Pitäs say:

Someone in our family will fast, bathe in the Yamunä's waters, and worship Lord Govinda in
Mathura' during the Mülä-nakñatra in the bright half of the month of Jyaiñöha. Becasue of his deed we
were delivered and we attained sublime opulence.
Text 302
samabhyarcya janärdanam
dhanyo 'sau piëòa-nirväpaà
yamunäyäà kariñyati
jyaiñöhasya-of Jyaistha; çukla-dvädaçyäm-in the çukla-dvädaçé; samabhyarcya-having worshiped;

janärdanam-Lord Janärdana; dhanyaù-fortunate; asau-he; piëòa-nirväpam-offering piëòa; yamunäyäm-
in the Yamunä; kariñyati-will do.
A person who during the çukla-dvädaçé in the month of Jyaiñöha worships Lord Janärdana by the
Yamunä's shore is fortunate. He will attain the result of offering piëòa.
Text 303
brahma-vaivarte
jyaiñöhämüläsite pakñe
samabhyarcya janärdanaà
dhanyänäà kulajaù piëòän
yamunäyäà pradäsyati
brahma-vaivarte-in the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa; jyaiñöhä-mülä-site pakñe-in the Mula-naksatra in

the bright half of the month of Jyaistha; samabhyarcya-having worshiped; janärdanam-Lord Janärdana;
dhanyänäm-fortunate; kulajaù-descendent; piëòän-piëòa; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; pradäsyati-will
give.
In the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa it is said:
A person who during Mülä-nakñatra in the bright fortnight of the month of Jyaiñöha worships Lord
Janärdana by the Yamunä's shore, attains the same result a person born in a noble family attains when
offering piëòa.
Text 304-305
båhan-näradéye
jyaiñöhe mäsi paurëamäsyäà

mülarkñe präyato naraù
snätvä ca yamunäyäà vai
mathuräyäm upoñitaù
abhyarcya vidhinä viñëuà
yat phalaà labhate dvijaù
tat pravaksyämi vaù samyäk
çåëudhvaà gadato mama
båhan-näradéye-in the Brhan Narada Puräëa; jyaiñöhe mäsi-in the month of Jyaistha;
paurëamäsyäm-in the full moon; mülarkñe-in the Mula-naksatra; präyataù-mostly; naraù-a person;
snätvä-having bathed; ca-and; yamunäyäm-in the Yamunä; vai-indeed; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä;
upoñitaù-fasting; abhyarcya-worshiping; vidhinä-according to the rules; viñëum-Lord Viñëu; yat-what;
phalam-result; labhate-attains; dvijaù-a brähmaëa; tat-that; pravaksyämi-I will say; vaù-to you;
samyäk-completely; çåëudhvam-please listen; gadataù-speaking; mama-My.
In the Båhan-Närada Puräëa it is said:
Listen, O brähmaëas, and I will tell you the result a person attains when, during the Müla'-nakñatra
in the full moon of the month of Jyaiñöha, he fasts in Mathurä, bathes in the Yamunä, and then
worships Lord Viñëu.
Text 306
janmäyutärjitaiù päpair
muktaù koöi-kulänvitaù
brahmaëaù padam äsädya
tatraiva parimucyate
janma-births; äyuta-billions; arjitaiù päpair-from the sins; muktaù-free; koöi-kula-anvitaù-with

millions of relatives; brahmaëaù-of Brahmä; padam-the abode; äsädya-attaining; tatra-there; eva-
indeed; parimucyate-is liberated.
He becomes free from the sins of billions of births. With millions of his family he goes to Brahma's
abode and then he becomes liberated.
Text 307 and 308
padma-puräëe
saìkräntau ravi-väre ca
saptamyäà vaidhåtau tathä
vyatipäte ca hastarkñe
tväñöre pauïce punar-vasau
ekadäçyäà caturdaçyäm
añöamyäà ca vidhukñaye
paurëamäsyäà ca pürvoktaà
phalaà çata-guëaà bhavet
padma-puräëe-in the Padma Puräëa; saìkräntau-in Sankranti; ravi-väre-on Sunday; ca-and;

saptamyäm-on saptami; vaidhåtau-during Vaidhrti; tathä-then; vyatipäte-on Vyatipata; ca-and;
hastarkñe-during Hasta-naksatra; tväñöre-Tvastra; pauïce'panca; punarvasau-Punarvasu; ekadäçyäm-
ekädaçé; caturdaçyäm-caturdasi; añöamyäm-astami; ca-and; vidhukñaye-the new moon;
paurëamäsyäm-the full moon; ca-and; pürva-previously; uktam-said; phalam-result; çata-guëam-
increased a hundred times; bhavet-will be.
In the Padma Puräëa it is said:

On Saìkränti, Sunday, Saptamé, Vaidhåti, Vyatipäta, Hastä-nakñatra, Tväñöra, Pauïca, Punarvasu,
Ekädaçé, Caturdaçé, Añöamé, the new moon, and the full moon, the previously described results are
multiplied hundreds of times.
Text 309
tad eva koöi-guëitaà

grahaëe candra-süryayoù
dvädaçyäm arcayed viñëum
ekadaçyäm upoñya yaù
kälindyäà tasya sulabhaà
tad viñëoù paramaà padam
tad-that; eva-indeed; koöi-guëitam-multiplied by millions of times; grahaëe candra-süryayoù-in an

eclipse of the sun or the moon; dvädaçyäm-on a dvädaçé; arcayed-may worship; viñëum-Viñëu;
ekadaçyäm-on ekädaçé; upoñya-fasting; yaù-who; kälindyäm-in the Yamunä; tasya-of him; sulabham-
easy to attain; tad-that; viñëoù-of Viñëu; paramam-supreme; padam-abode.
During a solar or lunar eclipse the results are multiplied by millions of times. A person who by the
shore of the Yamuna' worships Lord Viñëu on Dvädaçé or fasts on Ekädaçé, easily attains Lord
Viñëu's transcendental abode.
Text 310
atha mathurä-brähmaëa-mähätmyam. ädi-värähe
anåco mäthuro yaç ca

catur-vedas tathä paraù
catur-vedaà parityajya
mäthuraà bhojayed dvijam
atha-now; mathurä-brähmaëa-mähätmyam-glorification of the brähmaëas in Mathurä; ädi-värähe-in
the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; anrcaù-not learned in the Vedé mantras; mäthuraù-from Mathurä; yaù-who; ca-
and; catur-vedaù-learned in the four Vedas; tathä-so; paraù-greater; catur-vedam-the four Vedas;
parityajya-abandoning; mäthuram-from Mathurä; bhojayed-should feed; dvijam-the brähmaëa.
Glorification of Mathurä's Brähmaëas
There are two brähmaëas. One lives in Mathura' and is not learned in the Vedas. The other does not
live in Mathurä, although he knows the four Vedas very well. One should ignore the brähmaëa learned
in the four Vedas and should feed the brähmaëa who lives in Mathurä.
Text 311
kåñi-balo duräcäro
dharma-märga-paräì-mukhaù
édåço 'pi püjanéyo
mäthuro mama rüpa-dhåk
kåñi-balaù-a farmer; duräcäraù-a ruffian; dharma-märga-parän--mukhaù-one averse to the path of

religion; édåçaù-like this; api-even; püjanéyaù-should be worshiped; mäthuraù-from Mathurä; mama-
My; rüpa-dhåk-own form.
Whether a farmer, a ruffian, or a sinner who turns his face from the path of religion, any resident of
Mathura' should be worshiped. He is representation of My own form.
Text 312
mäthuränäà ca yad rüpaà

tad rüpaà me vasundare
ekasmin bhojite vipre
koöir bhavati bhojitäù
mäthuränäm-of the people of Mathurä; ca-and; yad rüpam-what form; tad rüpam-that form; me-of
Me; vasundare'O earth; ekasmin-in one place; bhojite-fed; vipre-a brähmaëa; koöir-millions; bhavati'is;
bhojitäù-fed.
O earth-goddess, the brähmaëas of Mathura' are My own form. When one of them is fed it is like
feeding millions of other brähmaëas.
Text 313
mäthurä mama püjyä hi

mäthurä mama vallabhäù
mäthure parituñöe vai
tuñöo 'haà nätra saàçayaù
mäthurä-from Mathurä; mama-My; püjyä-to be worshiped; hi-indeed; mäthurä-the people of

Mathurä; mama-My; vallabhäù-dear; mäthure-in Mathurä; parituñöe-pleased; vai-indeed; tuñöaù-
pleased; aham-I; na-not; atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.
Mathurä's brähmaëas are worshiped by Me. Mathurä's brähmaëas are dear to Me. When Mathurä's
brähmaëas are pleased, I am pleased. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 314
bhavanti puëya-térthäni
puëyäny ayatanäni ca
maìgaläni ca sarväni
yatra tiñöhanti mäthuräù
bhavanti-are; puëya-térthäni-holy places; puëyäny ayatanäni-holy temples; ca-and; maìgaläni-

auspicious; ca-and; sarväni-all; yatra-where; tiñöhanti-stand; mäthuräù-people of Mathurä.
All holy places, all holy temples, and all auspiciousnesses stay where Mathurä-brähmaëas reside.
Text 315
atha mathurä-väsi-mähätmyam. ädi-värähe
ye vasanti mahä-bhäge
mathuräà itare janäù
te 'pi yänti paräà siddhià
mat-prasädän na saàçayaù
atha-now; mathurä-väsi-mähätmyam-glorification of the residents of Mathurä; ädi-värähe-in the

Ädi-varäha Puräëa; ye-who; vasanti'reside; mahä-bhäge-O fortunate one; mathuräm-Mathura' itare
janäù-other people; te-they; api yänti-attain; paräm-supreme; siddhim-perfection; mat-prasädät-from
My mercy; na-not; saàçayaù-doubt.
Glorification of the Residents of Mathurä
In the Ädi-väräha Puräëa it is said:

O fortunate one, they who reside in Mathura', but are not brähmaëas, by My mercy attain the
supreme perfection. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 316
yas tatra nivased devi

samyato hi jitendriyaù
tri-kälam api bhuïjäno
väyu-bhakña-samo hi saù
yaù-who; tatra-there; nivased-resides; devi-O goddess; samyataù-controlled; hi-indeed; jita-

indriyaù-conquered the senses; tri-kälam'three times; api-also; bhuïjänaù-eating; väyu-bhakña-samaù-
equal to someone who eats the wind; hi-indeed; saù-he.
O goddess, a person who lives there (in Mathurä), although he be a prisoner of his senses, is like one
who has conquered them, and although he eats three times a day, is like an sceté that only eats the
wind.
Text 317
mathuräyäà mahä-puryäà
ye vasanty açcui-vratäù
balibhikña-pradätäro
deväs te nara-vigrahäù
mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; mahä-puryäm-the great city; ye-who; vasanti-reside; açcui-to uncelan

deeds; vratäù-vowed; balibhikña-pradätäraù-granting benedictions; deväù-demigods; te-they; nara-
vigrahäù-in the forms of men.
They who, although avowed to unclean works, live in the great city of Mathurä, are demigods that
grant benedictions, although they bear human forms.
Text 318
mathurä-väsino lokäù
sarve te mukti-bhäjanäù
api kéöäù pataìgo vä
tiryag-yoni-gato 'pi vä
mathurä-väsino lokäù-residents of Mathurä; sarve-all; te-they; mukti-bhäjanäù-liberated; api'even;

kéöäù-worms and insects; pataìgaù-moths and birds; vä tiryag-yoni-gataù-beasts; api-even; vä-or.
They who live in Mathurä, even the worms, insects, moths, birds, and beasts, are all liberated.
Text 319
tiñöhed yuga-sahasraà tu
padänaikena yaù pumän
tasyädhikaà bhavet puëyaà
mathuräyäà niväsinaù
tiñöhed-may stay; yuga-sahasram-for na thousand yugas; tu-indeed; pada-anaikena-standing on one

foot; yaù-who; pumän-a person; tasya-of him; adhikam-greater; bhavet-is; puëyam-piety; mathuräyäm-
in Mathurä; niväsinaù-residents.
By living in Mathura' one attains more piety than by performing the harsh austerity of standing on
one foot for a thousand yugas.
Text 320
para-dara-ratä ye ca
ye narä ajitendriyäù
mathurä-väsinaù sarve
te devä nara-vigrahäù
para-dara-ratä-adulterers; ye-who; ca-and; ye-who; naräh-people; ajitendriyäù-uncontrolled senses»

mathurä-väsinaù-residents of Mathurä; sarve-all; te-they; deväh-demigods; nara-vigrahäù'in huamn
form.
They who live in Mathura' and are adulterers, or are defeated by their senses, are all demigods in
human form.
Text 321
siddhä bhüta-gaëäù sarve

ye ca deva-gaëä bhuvi
mathurä-väsino lokäàs
te paçyanti catur-bhujän
siddhäh-Siddhas; bhüta-gaëäù-Bhutas; sarve-all; ye-who; ca-and; deva-gaëäh-devas; bhuvi-on the

earth; mathurä-väsinaù-residents of Mathurä; lokäàùpeople; te-they; paçyanti'see; catur-bhujän-with
four arms.
All Siddhas, Bhütas, and Devas who come to earth see the people of Mathura' as four-armed
residents of Vaikuëöha.
Text 322
mathuräyäà ye vasanti
viñëu-rüpä hi te khalüajïänäs tän na paçyanti
paçyanti jïäna-cakñuñaù
mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; ye-who; vasanti-reside; viñëu-rüpäh-forms of Viñëu; hi-indeed; te-they;

khalu-indeed; ajïänäù-unknowing; tan-them; na-not; paçyanti-see; paçyanti-see; jïäna-of knowledge;
cakñuñaù-with eyes.
They who live in Mathura' have forms like Lord Viñëu's form. The ignorant cannot see it, but they
who have eyes of knowledge see it.
Text 323
mathuräyäà pure yas tu

präsädaà pura-väsinäm
kärayitvä tu manujo
jäyate sa catur-bhujaù
mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; pure-in the city; yaù-who; tu-indeed; präsädam-a palace; pura-väsinäm-of
the people of the city; kärayitvä-creating; tu-indeed; manujaù-a person; jäyate-is born; sah-he; catur-
bhujaù-with four arms.
A person who builds a palace for the residents of Mathura' becomes in his next birth a four-armed
resident of Vaikuëöha.
Text 324
skände
mathurä-väsino lokän
manasäpi dviñanti ye
na jätu bhavitä teñäà
viraho nirayaiù saha
skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; mathurä-väsinaù-residents of Mathurä; lokän-worlds; manasä-with the

heart; api-even; dviñanti-hate; ye-who; na-not; jätu'ever; bhavitä-will be; teñäm- virahaù-separation;
nirayaiù-from hell; saha-with.
For they who in their hearts hate the residnets of Mathura' the tortures of hell will not cease.
Text 325
mathurä-väsinäà kurvanty upakärän manäg api

ye loka nästi teñäà hi
puëyasyäntaù kadäcana
mathurä-väsinäm-of the residents of Mathurä; kurvanti-do; upakärän-help; manäg-slightly; api-

even; ye-who; lokäh-people; na-not; asti'is; teñäm-of them; hi-indeed; puëyasya-of piety; antaù'end;
kadäcana-ever.
The piety gained by they who, even slightly, help the residents of Mathura', will never end.
Text 326
dhanyä mathurä-väsäs te
vasanti hari-sannidhau
catur-varëa-varaù so 'yaà
pibate yamunä-jalam
pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; pätäla-khaëòe-Patala-khaëòa; dhanyäh-fortunate; mathurä-väsäù-

residents of Mathurä; te-they; vasanti-reside; hari-sannidhau-near Lord Hari; catur-varëa-varaù-best of
the four varnas; saù ayam-he; pibate-drinks; yamunä-jalam-Yamuna' water.
The residents of Mathura' are fortunate, for they live near Lord Hari. A person who drinks the water
of the Yamuna' belongs to the best of the four varëas.
Text 327
svapacäù pavanäs te 'tra

vasanti mathurä-pure
anya-deça-stha-vipräëäà
mathurä-väsino 'dhikäù
svapacäù-dogeaters; pavanäù-purified; te-they; atra-here; vasanti-reside; mathurä-pure'in Mathurä;

anya-deça-stha-in another country; vipräëäm-brähmaëas; mathurä-väsinaù-residents of Mathurä;
adhikäù-greater.
Dogeaters who live in Mathura' City become purified. The ordinary people of Mathura' are better
than the brähmaëas in other places.
Text 328
mathurä-väsino dhanyä
manyä api divaukasäm
agaëya-mahimänas te
sarva eva catur-bhujäù
tatra-there; eva-indeed; nirväëa-khaëòe-in the Nirvana-khaëòa; mathurä-väsinaù-the residents of

Mathurä; dhanyäh-fortunate; manyäh-glorious; api'also; divaukasäm-of the residents of heaven;
agaëya-measureless; mahimänaù-glories; te-they; sarve-all;; eva-indeed; catur-bhujäù-with four arms.
In the same scripture, in the Nirvana-khaëòa, it is said:
The residents of Mathura' are fortunate. They are more exalted than the demigods in heaven. Their
glories cannot be counted. They are all four-armed residents of Vaikuëöha.
Text 329
mathurä-väsinäà ye tu
doñaà paçyanti mänaväù
te sva-doñaà na paçyanti
janma-måtyu-sahasra-dam
mathurä-väsinäm-residents of Mathurä; ye-who; tu-indeed; doñam-fault; paçyanti-see; mänaväù-

people; te-they; sva-doñam-own fault; na-not; paçyanti-see; janma-births; måtyu-and deaths; sahasra-
thousands; dam-giving.
People who see fault in the residents of Mathura' do not see their own mistake, which will bring
them thousands of births and deaths.
Text 330
taträdi-väräha-mataà madhuvanaà purädbhir apy astéti. tathä hi
tena dåñöä ca sä ramyä

väsavasya puré yathä
vanair dvädaçabhir yuktä
puëya päpa-harä çubhä
tatra-there; ädi-väräha-matam-the opinion of Ädi-varäha Puräëa; madhuvanam-Madhuvana;

purädbhir-with the floods; api-even; asti-is; iti-thus; tathä'so; hi-indeed; tena-by him; dåñöä-seen; ca-
and; sä-it; ramyä-charming; väsavasya-of Indra; puré'the city; yathä-as; vanair-with forests;
dvädaçabhir-12; yuktä-endowed; puëya-sacred; päpa-harä'removing sins; çubhä-auspicious.
The Ädi-varäha Puräëa considers that the forest of Madhuvana continues to exist after the great
flood of cosmé devastation. It further says:
For one who sees sacred and auspicious Mathurä, which has twelve forests, and which destroys sins,
it is as beautiful as Indra's capitol.
Text 331
atha dvädaça-vananaà mähätmyam. tatra madhuvanasya
ramyaà madhuvanaà näma

viñëu-sthänam anuttamam
yad dåñövä manujo devi
sarvän kamän aväpnuyät
atha-now; dvädaça-vananam-of the 12 forests; mähätmyam-glorification; tatra-there;

madhuvanasya-of Madhuvana; ramyam-charming; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; näma-named; viñëu-
sthänam-Viñëu's place; anuttamam-peerless; yad-which; dåñövä-having seen; manujaù-a person; devi-
O goddess; sarvän-all; kamän-desires; aväpnuyät-attains.
Glorification of Mathurä's Twelve Forests
Glorification of of Madhuvana
O goddess, a person who sees Lord Viñëu's beautiful and peerless abode of Madhuvana, attains all
his desires.
Text 332
tälavanasya. ädi-värähe
vanaà tälavanäkhyaà ca
dvitéyaà vanam uttamam
yatra snätvä naro devi
kåta-kåtyo 'bhijäyate
tälavanasya-of Talavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; vanam- tälavanäkhyam-Talavana

forest; ca-and; dvitéyam-second; vanam-forest; uttamam-transcendental; yatra-where; snätvä-having
bathed; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; kåta-kåtyaù-successful; abhijäyate-becomes.
Glorification of Tälavana

The second forest is transcendental Tälavana. O goddess, a person who bathes there attains all
success.
Text 333
tatra kuëòaà svaccha-jalaà

nélotpala-vibhüñitam
tatra snänena dänena
väïchitaà phalam äpnuyät
tatra-there; kuëòam-lake; svaccha-clear; jalam-water; nélotpala-with blue lotuses; vibhüñitam-

ornamented; tatra-there; snänena-by bathing; dänena-by charity; väïchitam-desired; phalam-result;
äpnuyät-attains.
The clear-water lake there is decorated with blue lotuses. By bathing there or giving charity there,
one attains his desire.
Text 334
aho talavanaà puëyaà

yatra tälair hato 'suraù
hitäya yädavänäà ca
ätma-kréòaëakäya ca
skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; ahaù-Oh; talavanam-Talavana;

puëyam-sacred; yatra-where; tälair-by tala trees; hataù-killed; asuraù-demon; hitäya-for the welfare;
yädavänäm-of the Yädavas; ca-and; ätma-kréòaëakäya-for pastimes; ca-and.
This is sacred Talavana where, to help the Lord's pastimes and to benefit the Yädavas, a demon was
killed by palm trees,.
Text 335

yatra kutra sthite jale
yädavatvaà aväpnoti
dehänte deva-darçanam
yaù-who; tatra-there; kurute snänam-bathes; yatra-where; kutra-where?; sthite-sitauted; jale'water;

yädavatvam-the state of being a Yädava; aväpnoti-attains; deha-of the body; ante-at the end; deva-of
the Lord; darçanam-the sight.
A person who bathes in the waters there becomes, at the end of his body, a Yädava who personally
sees the Lord.
Text 336
kumudavanasyädi-värähe
vanaà kumudvanäkhyaà ca
tåtéyam uttamaà param
tatra gatvä naro devi
kåta-kåtyo 'bhijäyate
kumudavanasya-of Kumudavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; vanam- kumudvanäkhyam-

Kumudavana; ca-and; tåtéyam'third; uttamam-supreme; param-next; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone;
naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; kåta-kåtyaù-successful; abhijäyate-becomes.
Glorification of Kumudavana

The third forest is transcendental Kumudavana. O goddess, a person who goes there attains all
success.
Text 337
kämyavanasyädi-värähe
caturthaà kämyakavanaà
vanänäà vanam uttamam
mama loke mahéyate
kämyavanasya-of Kamyavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; caturtham-the fourth;

kämyakavanam-Kamayavana» vanänäm- vanam uttamam-the best of forests; tatra-there; gatvä-having
gone; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; mama-My; loke-in the abode; mahéyate-glorified.
Glorification of Kämyavana
The fourth is Kämyavana, the best of all forests. O goddess, a person who goes there is glorified in
My abode.
Text 338
vimalasya ca kuëòe tu
sarvaà päpaà vimokñyate
yas tatra muïcati präëän
vimalasya-pure; ca-and; kuëòe-in the lake; tu-indeed; sarvam-all; päpam-sin; vimokñyate-free; yaù-
who; tatra-there; muïcati-gives up; präëän-life; mama-My; lokam-abode; sah-he; gacchati-goes.
In nearby Vimala-kuëòa one becomes free from all sins and, when leaving this life, goes to My
abode.
Text 339
tataù kämyavanaà räjan

yatra bälye sthito hariù
snäna-mätreëa sarveñäà
sarva-käma-phala-pradam
skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tataù-then; kämyavanam-
Kamayavana; räjan'O king; yatra-where; bälye-in childhood; sthitaù-situated; hariù-Hari; snäna-
mätreëa-simply by bathing; sarveñäm-of all; sarva-käma-phala-pradam-granting all desires.
In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura-khaëòa, it is said:
O king, next is Kämyavana, where Lord Hari stayed in His childhood. Simply by bathing here, any
person will attain all his desires.
Text 340
tatra käma-saro räjan

gopikä-ramaëaà saraù
tatra tértha-sahasräëi
saräàsi ca påthak påthak
tatra-there; käma-saraù-Kama-sarivara; räjan-O king; gopikä-ramaëam- saraù-Gopikaramana-

sarovara; tatra-there; tértha-sahasräëi-thousands of holy places; saräàsi-lakes; ca-and; påthak påthak-
variously.
In that place are Käma-sarovara, Gopikäramaëa-sarovara, many other lakes, and thousands of holy
places.
Text 341
bahulävanasyädi-värähe
païcamaà bähulavanaà
agni-sthänaà sa gacchati
bahulävanasya-of Bahulavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; païcamam-the fifth;

bähulavanam-Bahulavana; vanänäm- vanam uttamam-the best of forests; tatra-there; gatvä-having
gone; naraù-a person; devi-O goddess; agni-sthänam-Agniloka; sah-he; gacchati-goes.
Glorification of Bahulävana
The fifth forest is Bahulävana, the best of forests. O goddess, a person who goes there attains
Agniloka
Text 342
bahulä çri-hareù patné

tatra tiñöhati sarvadä
tasmin padmavane räjan
bahu-puëya-phaläni ca
skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; bahulä-Bahulä; çri-hareù-of Lord

Kåñëa; patné'wife; tatra-there; tiñöhati-stays; sarvadä-always; tasmin-there; padmavane-ina forest of
lotuses; räjan-O king; bahu-puëya-phaläni-many pious results; ca-and.
Lord Hari's wife Bahula' stays there always. O king, in the forest of lotus flowers there one attains
the result of many pious deeds.
Text 343
tatraiva ramate viñëur

lakñmyä särdhaà sadaiva hi
tatra saìkarñaëaà kuëòam
tatra mäna-saro nåpa
tatra-there; eva-indeed; ramate-enjoys; viñëur-Viñëu; lakñmyä särdham-with Lakñmé; sadä-always;

eva-indeed; hi-indeed; tatra-there; saìkarñaëam- kuëòam-Sankarsana-kuëòa; tatra-there; mäna-saraù-
Mana-sarovara; nåpa-O king.
There Lord Viñëu enjoys pastimes with Lakñmé eternally. In that place is Saìkarñaëa-kuëòa. In that
place is Mäna-sarovara, O king.
Text 344

madhu-mäse nåpottamäsa paçyati harià tatra
lakñmyä saha viçämpate
yaù-who; tatra-there; kurute snänam-bathes; madhu-mäse-in the month opf Caitra; nåpottama-O
king; sah-he» paçyati-sees; harim-Kåñëa; tatra-there; lakñmyä saha-with Lakñmé; viçämpate-O king.
O king, a person who bathes there during the month of Caitra (March-April, sees Lord Viñëu and
Lakñmé there.
Text 345
bhadravanasyädi-värähe
tasmin bhadravanaà näma

ñañöhaà ca vanam uttamam
tatra gatvä tu vasudhe
mad-bhakto mat-paräyaëaù
tad vanasya prabhävena
nägalokaà sa gacchati
bhadravanasya-of Bhadravana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tasmin-there; bhadravanam-

Bhadravana; näma-named; ñañöham-sxith; ca-and; vanam-forest; uttamam-transcendental; tatra-there;
gatvä-having gone; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; mad-bhaktaù-My devotee; mat-paräyaëaù-devoted to
Me; tad vanasya-of that forest; prabhävena-by the power; nägalokam-to Nagaloka; sah-he; gacchati-
goes.
Glorification of Bhadravana
Bhadravana is the sixth transcendental forest. O earth-goddess, a devotee attached to Me who goes
there, goes to Nägaloka by the power of that forest.
Text 346
khadiravanasyädi-värähe
saptamaà tu vanaà bhümau

khädiraà loka-viçrutam
tatra gatvä naro bhadre
khadiravanasya-of Kadiravana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; saptamam-seventh; tu-indeed;

vanam- -forest; bhümau-on the earth; khädiram-Kadira; loka-viçrutam-famous in the world; tatra-there;
gatvä-having gone; naraù-a person; bhadre-O auspicious one; mama-My; lokam-abode; sah-he;
gacchati-goes.
Glorification of Khadiravana
The sixth forest is famous on the earth as Khadiravana. O auspicious one, a person who goes there
will go to My abode.
Text 347
mahävanasyädi-värähe
mahävanaà cäñöamaà tu
sadaiva hi mama priyam
tasmin gatvä tu manuja
indraloke mahéyate
mahävanasya-of Mahavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mahävanam-Mahavana; ca-and;

añöamam-eighth; tu-indeed; sadä-always; eva hi-indeed; mama-My; priyam-dear; tasmin-there; gatvä-
having gone; tu-indeed; manujah-a person; indraloke-Indraloka; mahéyate-is glorified.
Glorification of Mahävana
The eighth forest is Mahävana, which is very dear to Me. A person who goes there is glorified on
Indraloka.
Text 348
yamalärjuna-térthaà ca
kuëòaà tatra ca vartate
paryastaà yatra çakaöaà
bhinna-bhäëòa-kuöé-ghatam
yamalärjuna-tértham-Yamalarjuna-tértha; ca-and; kuëòam-lake; tatra-there; ca-and; vartate-is;

paryastam-overturned; yatra-where; çakaöam-the cart; bhinna-broken; bhäëòa-kuöé-ghatam-pots and
pans.
In that place are Yamalärjuna-tértha and Yamalärjuna-kuëòa. In that place is the place where the
cart was overturned and the pots and pans were broken.
Text 349
tatra snänopaväsena
anantaà phalam äpnuyäötatra gopéçvaro näma
mahä-pätaka-näçanaù
tatra-there; snäna-by bathing; upaväsena-and fasting; anantam-limitless; phalam-result; äpnuyät-

attains; tatra-there; gopéçvaraù-Gopisvara; näma-named; mahä-pätaka-näçanaù-destroying great sins.
By fasting and bathing in that place one attains a limitless result. The Deity Gopéçvara there
destroys great sins.
Text 350
sapta-sämudrikaà näma
kuëòaà tu vimalodakam
devasyägre tu vasudhe
gopéçasya mahätmanaù
sapta-sämudrikam- näma kuëòam-Sapta-samudrika-kuëòa; tu-indeed; vimalodakam-with clear

water; devasya-the Deity; agre-before; tu-indeed; vasudhe-O earth; gopéçasya mahätmanaù-of Lord
Gopéçvara.
O earth-goddess, before the Deity of Lord Gopéçvara is a clear-water lake named Saptasämudrika-
kuëòa.
Text 351
pitaraç cäbhinandanti
päniyaà piëòaà eva ca
soma-väre tö amävasyäà
piëòa-dänaà karoti yaù
gayä-piëòaà pradänaà ca
kåtaà nästy atra saàçayaù
pitaraù-the pitäs; ca-and; abhinandanti-rejoice; päniyam-water; piëòam-piëòa; eva-indeed; ca-and;

soma-vare-on Monday; tö amävasyäm-on the new-moon day; piëòa-of piëòa; dänam-offering; karoti-
does; yaù-who; gayä-piëòam-piëòa at Gayä; pradänam-offering; ca-and; kåtam-done; na-not; asti-is;
atra-here; saàçayaù-doubt.
The pitäs enjoy water and piëòa there. A person who on a Monday new-moon day offers piëòa
there, offers piëòa at Gayä. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 352
lohajaìghavanasyädi-värähe
lohajaìghavanaà näma
lohajaìghena rakñitamnavamaà tu vanaà devi
sarva-pätaka-näçanam
lohajaìghavanasya-of Lohajaìghavana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; lohajaìghavanam-

näma-named Lohajaìghavana; lohajaìghena-by Lohajaìgha; rakñitam-protected; navamam-ninth; tu-
indeed; vanam-forest; devi-O goddess; sarva-of all; pätaka-sins; näçanam-destruction.
Glorification of Lohajaìghavana
O goddess, Lohajaìghavana, which was protected by Lohajaìghäsura, and which destroys all sins, is
the ninth forest.
Text 353
bilvavanasya
vanaà bilvavanaà näma

daçamaà deva-püjitam
tatra gatvä tu manujo
brahmaloke mahéyate
bilvavanasya-of Blivavana; vanam- bilvavanam- näma-the forest named Blivavana; daçamam-tenth;

deva-by the demigodsl; püjitam-worshiped; tatra-there; gatvä-having gone; tu-indeed; manujaù-a
person; brahmaloke-in Brahmaloka; mahéyate-glorified.
Glorification of Bilvavana
The forest named Bilvavana, which is worshiped by the demigods, is the tenth forest. A person who
goes there is glorified on Brahmaloka.
Text 354
bhäëòéravanasya
ekädaçaà tu bhäëòéraà
yoginäà priyam uttamam
tasya darçana-mätreëa
naro garbhaà na gacchati
bhäëòéravanasya-of Bhäëòéravana; ekädaçam- tu-indeed; bhäëòéram-Bhäëòéra; yoginäm-of the

yogis; priyam-dear; uttamam-most; tasya-of that» darçana-by seeing; mätreëa-only; naraù-a person;
garbham-a mother's womb;û na-not; gacchati-goes.
Glorification of Bhäëòéravanä
The eleventh forest is Bhäëòéravana, which is very dear to the yogés. Simply by seeing it, a person
will never again enter a mother's womb.
Text 355
bhäëòéraà samanupräpya
väsudevaà tato dåñövä
punar-janma na vidyate
bhäëòéram-Bhäëòéra; samanupräpya-attaining; vanänäm-of forests; vanam-forest; uttamam-best;

väsudevam-Lord Väsudeva; tataù-then; dåñövä-having seen; punar-again; janma-birth; na-not; vidyate-
is.
A person who visits Bhäëòéravana, the best of forests, and sees the Deity of Lord Väsudeva there,
never takes birth again.
Text 356
tasmin bhäëòérake snätvä

samyato niyatäçanaù
sarva-päpa-vinirmukta
indralokaà sa gacchati
tasmin-there; bhäëòérake-in Bhäëòéravana; snätvä-having bathed; samyataù-controlling the senses;

niyatäçanaù'fasting; sarva-päpa-all sins;vinirmuktah-free; indralokam-Indra's abode; saù-he; gacchati-
goes.
A person who, fasting and controlling his senses, bathes in Bhäëòéravana, becomes free of all sins
and goes to Indraloka.
Text 357
çri-våndävanasyädi-värähe
våndävanaà dvädaçamaà
våndayä parirakñitam
mama caiva priyaà bhüme
sarva-pätaka-näçanam
çri-våndävanasya-of Våndävana; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; våndävanam-Våndävana;

dvädaçamam-twelfth; våndayä-by Vånda'-devé; parirakñitam'protected; mama-My; ca-and; eva-indeed;
priyam-favorite; bhüme-on the earth; sarva-all; pätaka-sins; näçanam-destroying.
Glorification of Çré Våndävana

The twelfth forest is Våndävana, which is protected by Våndä-devi, and which destroys all sins, O
earth-goddess, it is My favorite.
Text 358
taträhaà kréòayiñyämi
gopé-gopälakaiù saha
su-ramyaà su-pratétaà ca
deva-dänava-durlabham
tatra-there; aham-I; kréòayiñyämi-will enjoy pastimes; gopé-with the gopés; gopälakaiù-and gopas;
saha-with; su-ramyam-very charming; su-pratétam-very famous; ca-and; deva-for the devas; dänava-
and danavas; durlabham-difficult to attain.
It is very beautiful and very famous. The devas and dänavas can attain it only with great difficulty.
There I will enjoy pastimes with the gopas and gopés.
Text 359
tato våndävanaà puëyaà

våndä-devi-samäçritam
hariëädhiñöhitaà tä ca
rudra-brahmädi-sevitam
skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; tataù-then; våndävanam-

Våndävana; puëyam-sacred; våndä-devé-by Våndä-devé; samäçritam-sheltered; hariëä-by Lord Hari;
adhiñöhitam-resided; tat-that; ca-and; rudra-brahma-ädi-by the demigods headed by Brahma' and Çiva;
sevitam-served.
Next is sacred Våndävana, where Lord Hari resides. It is protected by Våndä-devi and served by
Brahma, Çiva, and the demigods.
Text 360
våndävanaà su-gahanaà
viçälaà viståtaà bahu
munénäm açramaiù pürëaà
vanya-våndä-samänvitam
våndävanam-Våndävana; su-gahanam-very dense; viçälam-large; viståtam-expanded; bahu-great;

munénäm'of sages; açramaiù-with açramas; pürëam-filled; vanya-våndä-with creatures and flowers of
the forest; samänvitam-filled.
Våndävana is very large and dense. It is filled with sages' äçramas. It is filled with the creatures and
flowers of the forest.
Text 361
yathä lakñméù priyatamä

yathä bhakti-parä naräù
govindasya priyatamaà
tathä våndävanaà bhuvi
yathä-as; lakñméù-the goddess of fortune; priyatamä-most dear; yathä-as; bhakti-parä naräù-the

devotees; govindasya-of Govinda; priyatamam-most dear; tathä-in that way; våndävanam-Våndävana;
bhuvi-on the earth.
As Lakñmé-devé is dear, and as the devotees are dear, so in this world is Våndävana dear to Lord
Govinda.
Text 362
vatsair vatsa-tarébhiç ca
säkaà kréòati mädhavaù
våndävanäntara-gataù
sa-ramair bälakävåtaù
vatsair-with calves; vatsa-tarébhiù-cows; ca-and; säkam-with; kréòati-plays; mädhavaù-Kåñëa;

våndävanäntara-gataù-in Våndävana; sa-ramair-with Balaräma; bälaka-by the boys; ävåtaù-
accompanied.
In Våndävana Lord Mädhava enjoys pastimes with the cows, calves, boys, and Balaräma.
Text 363
aho våndävanaà ramyaà

yatra govardhano giriù
yatra térthäny anekäni
viñëudeva-kåtäni ca
ahaù-Oh; våndävanam-Våndävana; ramyam-charming; yatra-where; govardhano giriù-Govardhana

Hill; yatra-where; térthäni-sacred places; anekäni-many; viñëudeva-kåtäni-made by Lord Viñëu; ca-
and.
Oh, Våndävana is beautiful with Govardhana Hill and with many holy places made sacred by Lord
Viñëu.
Text 364
pädme nirväëa-khaëòe
paramänanda-kandäkhyaà
mahä-pätaka-näçanam
samasta-duùkha-samhantå-
jéva-mätra-vimuktidam
pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; nirväëa-khaëòe-Nirväëa-khaëòa; paramänanda-kanda-äkhyam-known

as the source of transcendental bliss; mahä-pätaka-näçanam-destroying great sins; samasta-duùkha-
samhantå-destroying all sufferings; jéva-mätra-vimuktidam-giving liberation to the living entities.
In the Padma Puräëa, Nirväëa-khaëòa, it is said:
Våndävana is filled with transcendental bliss. It destroys the greatest sins. It ends all sufferings.
Simply living within it grants liberation.
Text 365
çré-daçama-skande
vanaà våndävanaà näma

paçavyaà nava-känanam
gopa-gopé-gaväà sevyaà
puëyädri-tåëa-vérudham
çré-daçama-skande-in the Tenth Canto of Çrémad-Bhägavatam; vanaà-another forest; våndävanaà

näma-named Våndävana; paçavyaà-a very suitable place for maintenance of the cows ad other animals;
nava-känanam-there are many new gardenlike places; gopa-gopé-gaväà-for all the cowherd men, the
members of their families, and the cows; sevyaà-a very happy, very suitable place; puëya-adri-there are
nice mountains; tåëa-plants; vérudham-and creepers.
In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.11.28, it is said:
Between Nandéçvara and Mahavana is a place named Våndävana. This place is very suitable
because it is lush with grass, plants and creepers for the cows and other animals. It has nice gardens and
tall mountains and is full of facilities for the happiness of all the gopas and gopés and our animals.*
Text 366
våndävanaà sakhi bhuvo vitanoti kértià

yad devaké-suta-padämbuja-labdha-lakñméù
govinda-veëum anu-matta-mayüra-nåtyaà
prekñyädri-sänv-avataräny asamasta-sattvam
våndävanam-Våndävana; sakhi-O friend; bhuvaù-of the earth; vitanoti-expands; kértim-the fame;
yad'which; devaké-suta-of Devaké's son;pada-ambuja-lotus feet; labdha-attained; lakñméù-opulence;
govinda-of Kåñëa; veëum-the flute; anu-following; matta-maddened; mayüra-peacocks; nåtyam-
dancing; prekñya-seeing; adri-of the hill; sänv-on the top; avataräny asamasta-sattvam-not possible for
others.
In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.21.10, it is also said:
Dear friends, our Våndävana is proclaiming the glories of this entire earth because this planet is
glorified by the lotus footprints of the son of Devaké. Besides that, when Govinda plays His flute, the
peacocks immediately become mad. When all the animals and trees and plants, either on the top of
Govardhana Hill or in the valley, see the dancing of the peacock, they all stand still and listen to the
transcendental sound of the flute with great attention. We think that this boon is not possible or
available on any other planet.*
Text 367
etena våndävanasya loka-prasiddhyä ñodaça-kroçi-vistäratvaà yuktam eva. çri-govinda-

våndävanäkhye båhad-gautaméya-tantre tö idaà dåçyate. tatra närada-praçno yathä
kim idaà dvädaçabhikhyaà

våndäraëyaà viçämpate
çrotum icchämi bhagavan
yadi yogyo 'sti me vada
etena-by this; våndävanasya-of Våndävana; loka-in the world; prasiddhyä-by the fame; ñodaça-
kroçi-vistäratvam-16 kroças in size; yuktam-proper; eva-indeed; çri-govinda-våndävana-äkhye-in the
Govinda-Våndävana-çästra; båhad-gautaméya-tantre'in teh Båhad-gautaméya Tantra; tu-indeed; idam-
this; dåçyate-is seen; tatra-there; närada-of Närada; praçnaù-the question; yathä-as; kim-what?; idam-
this; dvädaçäbhikhyaàknown as the twelfth; våndäraëyam-Våndävana; viçämpate-O king; çrotum-to
hear; icchämi-I wish; bhagavan-O Lord; yadi-if;û yogyaù-proper; asti-is; me-for me. vada
Våndävana is famous in this world as being 16 kroças (32 size. This is seen in the Çré Govinda-
Våndävana-çästra and the Båhad-Gautaméya-tantra. In that scripture Närada asks the following
question:
What is Våndävana, which is named here as the twelfth forest? I desire to hear of it. O Lord, if You
think it is right, please tell me of it.
Text 368
tatra çri-kåñëasyottaram
idaà våndävanaà ramyaà

mama dhämaiva kevalam
atra ye paçavaù pakñi-
våkña-kéöa-narämaräù
ye ca santi mamädhiñöhe
måtä yänti mamälayam
tatra-there; çri-kåñëasya-of Lord Kåñëa; uttaram-answer; idam-this; våndävanam-Våndävana;

ramyam-beautiful; mama-My; dhäma-abode; eva-indeed; kevalam-transcendental; atra-here; ye-who;
paçavaù-animals; pakñi-birds; våkña-trees; kéöa-insects and words; nara-humans; amaräù-demigods;
ye-who; ca-and; santi-are; mama-My; adhiñöhe-stay; måtäù-after death; yänti-attain; mama-My;
alayam-abode.
Lord Kåñëa answered:
Beautiful Våndävana is My transcendental abode. The beasts, birds, trees, insects, worms, humans,
and demigods who stay here with Me will all go, when they die, to My own abode.
Text 369
atra ye gopa-kanyäç ca
nivasanti mamälaye
yoginyas tä mayä nityaà
mama seva-paräyaëäù
atra-here; ye-who; gopa-kanyäù-gopés; ca-and; nivasanti-reside; mama-My; alaye-in the abode;

yoginyaù-yoginés; täh-they; mayä-by Me; nityam-eternally; mama-My; seva-to the service; paräyaëäù-
devoted.
The gopés who reside here in My abode and serve Me with devotion stay eternally by My side.
Text 370
païca-yojanam evästi
vanaà me deha-rüpakam
kälindéyaà suñumëäkhyä
paramämåta-vähiné
atra deväç ca bhütäni
vartante sükñma-rüpataù
païca-yojanam-five yojanas; eva-indeed; asti-is; vanam-forest; me-My; deha-rüpakam-form;û
kälindéyam-in the Yamunä; suñumna-äkhyäh-named Suñumëä; parama-amåta-vähiné-a river of nectar;
atra-here; deväù-demigods; ca-and; bhütäni-sages; vartante-are; sükñma-in subtle; rüpataù-forms.
This forest of five yojanas (40 miles, is My body. This Yamunä is the Suñumnä River that flows
with nectar. The demigods and sages stay here in subtle forms.
Text 371
sarva-deva-mayaç cähaà
na tyajämi vanaà kvacit
ävirbhävas tirobhävo
bhaved atra yuge yuge
tejomayam idaà ramyam
adåçyaà carma-cakñusä
sarva-deva-mayaù-the personification of all the demigods; ca-and; aham-I; na-not; tyajämi-leave;

vanam-forest; kvacit-somewhere; ävirbhävaù-appearance;û tirobhävaù-disappearance; bhaved-is; atra-
here; yuge yuge-milleneium after millenium; tejomayam-splendid; idam-this; ramyam-charming;
adåçyam-invisible; carma-f flesh; cakñusä-eyes.
I, who am the personification of all the demigods, never leave this forest. Millenium after millenium
I appear and disappear. This splendidly beautiful forest then becomes invisible to material eyes.
Text 372
atha çri-govindasyädi-värähe
våndävane ca govindaà
ye paçyanti vasundhare
na te yama-purià yänti
yänti puëya-kåtäà gatim
atha-now; çri-govindasya-of Lord Govinda; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; våndävane-in

Våndävana; ca-and; govindam-Lord Govinda; ye-who; paçyanti-see; vasundhare'O earth; na-not; te-
they; yama-purim-Yama's city; yänti-attain; yänti'they go; puëya-kåtäm-of the pure; gatim-to the
destination.
Glorification of the Çré Govinda Deity

O earth-goddess, they who see the Govinda Deity in Våndävana do not go to Yamaräja's city. They
go to the place where pure-hearted saints go.
Text 373
skände mathurä-khaëòe çri-näradoktau
tasmin våndävane puëyaà

govindasya niketanam
tat-sevaka-samakérëaà
tatraiva sthéyate mayä
skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; çri-närada-uktau-in Närada's

words; tasmin-in this; våndävane-Våndävana; puëyam-sacred; govindasya-of Govinda; niketanam-the
temple; tat-sevaka-His servants; samakérëam-assembled; tatra-there; eva-indeed; sthéyate-is stood;
mayä-by me.
In the Skanda Puräëa, Mathurä-khaëòa, Çré Närada says:

In Våndävana is the sacred temple of Lord Govinda. When His servants are assembled, I stand
among them.
Text 374
bhuvi govinda-vaikuëöhaà
tasmin våndävane nåpa
yatra våndädayo bhåtyäù
santi govinda-manasaù
bhuvi-on the earth; govinda-vaikuëöham-Lord Govinda's Vaikuëöha abode; tasmin-in that;

våndävane-Våndävana;û nåpa-O king; yatra-where; våndä-ädayaù-beginning with Vånda'-devé;
bhåtyäù-servants; santi-are; govinda-manasaù-their hearts fixed on Lord Govinda.
O king, Våndävana, where Våndä-devi and others whose hearts are fixed on Lord Govinda stay, is
Lord Govinda's Vaikuëöha abode on this earth.
Text 375
våndävane mahä-sadma
yair dåñöaà puruñottamaiù
govindasya mahé-päla
te kåtärthä mahé-tale
våndävane-in Våndävana; mahä-sadma-great abode; yair-by whom; dåñöam-seen; puruña-uttamaiù-

by great souls; govindasya-of Lord Govinda; mahé-päla-O king; te-they; kåtärthäh-successful; mahé-
tale-on the earth.
O king, the great souls who see Lord Govinda's temple in Våndävana have attained all success on
this earth.
Text 376
atha çri-govinda-térthasya saura-puräne
govinda-svämi-térthäkhyam
asti térthaà mahottamam
vasudeva-tanüjasya
viñëor atyanta-vallabham
atha-now; çri-govinda-térthasya-of Çré Govinda-tértha; saura-puräne-in the Saura Puräëa; govinda-

svämi-térthäkhyam-named Govindasvämi-tértha; asti-is; tértham-a holy place; mahä-uttamam-great;
vasudeva-of Vasudeva; tanüjasya-of the son; viñëor-of Lord Viñëu;û atyanta-vallabham-very dear.
Glorification of Govinda-tértha
The great holy place named Govindasvämi-tértha is very dear to Lord Viñëu, who became the son
of King Vasudeva.
Text 377
govinda-svämi-nämatra
vasaty arcätmako 'cyutaù
tatra snätvä tam abhyarcya
muktim icchanti sädhavaù
govinda-svämi-näma-named Govinda-svämé; atra-here; vasati-resides; arcätmakaù-Deity; acyutaù-

Acyuta; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; tam-Him; abhyarcya-having worshiped; muktim-liberation»
icchanti-desire; sädhavaù-saints.
Here Lord Acyuta's Deity of Lord Govindasvämé resides. The saintly devotees bathe nearby,
worship the Deity, and yearn for release from the world of birth and death.
Text 378-379
atha çri-brahma-kuëòasyädi-värähe
tatra brähme mahä-bhäge

bahu-gulma-latävåtetatra snänaà prakurvéta
eka-rätroñito naraù
gandharvair apsarobhiç ca
kréòamänaù sa modate
tathätra muïcate präëän
atha-now; çri-brahma-kuëòasya-of Brahma-kuëòa; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tatra-there;

brähme-in Brahma-kuëòa; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; bahu-gulma-latäv-with many trees and vines;
ävåte-filled; tatra-there; snänam-bath; prakurvéta-does; eka-rätra-for one night; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a
person; gandharvair-with Gandharvas; apsarobhiù-apsaräs; ca-and; kréòamänaù-playing; sah-he;
modate-enjoys; tathä-so; atra-here; muïcate'is liberated; präëän-from life; mama-My; lokam-abode;
saù-he; gacchati-goes.
Glorification of Brahma-kuëòa

A person who, fasting for the night, bathes in beautiful Brahma-kuëòa, which is surrounded by
many trees and vines, enjoys pastimes with the Gandharvas and Apsaräs. Leaving this life here, he goes
to My abode.
Text 380
skände
tatra kuëòaà mahä-bhäge

bahu-gulma-latävåtam
puëyam eva mahä-térthaà
su-ramya-salilävåtam
skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; tatra-there; kuëòam-lake; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; bahu-gulma-
latä-ävåtam-surrounded with trees and vines; puëyam-sacred; eva-indeed; mahä-tértham-great holy
place; su-ramya-charming; salila-with water; ävåtam-filled.
O auspicious one, in this place is a very sacred lake with beautiful waters surrounded by many trees
and vines.
Text 381
tatra snänaà prakurvéta

catuù-käloñito naraù
modate vimale divye
gandharvänäà kule sukham
tatra-there; snänam-a bath; prakurvéta-does; catuù-käla-four times; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person;

modate-enjoys; vimale-in the pure; divye-splendid world; gandharvänäm-of Gandharvas; kule'in the
community; sukham-happiness.
A person who fasts and bathes here four times, enjoys in the community of Gandharvas in the
splendid heavenly world.
Text 382
taträpi muïcate präëän

satataà kåta-niçcayaù
gandharva-kulam utsåjya
tatra-there; api-also; muïcate-gives up; präëän-life; satatam-always; kåta-niçcayaù-determined;

gandharva-kulam-in the community of Gandharvas; utsåjya-giving up; mama-My; lokam-abode; saù-
he; gacchati-goes.
A person who stays here with determination and departs from this life here, leaves the company of
the Gandharvas and goes to My abode.
Text 383
taträçcaryaà pravakñyämi
tat çåëusva vasundhare
labhante manujäù siddhià
mama käryä-paräyaëäù
tatra-there; äçcaryam-a wonder; pravakñyämi-I will tell; tat-this; çåëusva-please listen;

vasundhare'O earth; labhante-attain; manujäù-people; siddhim-perfection; mama-My; käryä-paräyaëäù-
devoted to the service.
O earth-goddess, listen and I will tell you something wonderful: They who devotedly serve Me in
this place attain the supreme perfection.
Text 384-385
tasya tatrottara-pärçve
'çoka-våkñaù sita-prabhaù
vaiçäkhasya tu mäsasya
çukla-pakñasya dvädaçé
sa puñpati ca madhyähne
mama bhaktasukhävahaù
na kaçcid abhijänäti
vinä bhägavataà çucim
tasya-of this; tatra-there uttara-pärçve-north; açoka-våkñaù'an açoka tree; sita-prabhaù-white;

vaiçäkhasya-of Vaisakha; tu-indeed; mäsasya-of the month; çukla-pakñasya dvädaçé-on the çukla-
dvädaçé; sah-it; puñpati-blooms; ca-and; madhyähne-in mid-day; mama-My; bhakta-devottes;
sukhävahaù-bringing happiness; na-not; kaçcid-anyone; abhijänäti-knows; vinä-except; bhägavatam-
devotee; çucim-pure.
North of this place is a white asoka tree that in the month of Vaiçäkha (April-May,, on the çukla-
dvädaçé, at noon, suddenly bursts into full bloom. Except for My pure devotee, no one can understand
how this happens.
Text 386
atha keçi-térthasyädi-värähe
gaìgä çata-guëaà puëyaà

yatra keçé nipatitaù
taträpi ca viçeño 'sti
keçi-térthe vasundhare
tasmin piëòa-pradänena
gayä-piëòa-phalaà labhet
atha-now; keçi-térthasya-of Keçi-tértha; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; gaìgä-the Ganges;

çata-guëam-a hundred times; puëyam-sacred; yatra-where; keçé-Keçé; nipatitaù-died; tatra-there; api-
also; ca-and; viçeñaù-specific; asti-is; keçi-térthe-in Keçi-tértha; vasundhare-O earth; tasmin-there;
piëòa-pradänena'by offering piëòa; gayä-piëòa-phalam-result of offering piëòa in Gayä; labhet-attains.
Glorification of Keçi-tértha
Keçi-tértha, the place where Keçé died, is a hundred times more sacred than the Ganges. By
offering piëòa in Keçi-tértha one attains the result of offering piëòa in Gayä.
Text 387
atha käliya-hradasya tatraiva
käliyasya hradaà gatvä kréòäà kåtvä vasundhare

snäna-mätreëa tatraiva
atha-now; käliya-hradasya-of Käliya-hrada; tatra-there; eva-indeed; käliyasya hradam-Käliya-

hrada» gatvä-having gone; kréòäm-pastimes; kåtvä-having done; vasundhare-O earth; snäna-mätreëa-
simply by bathing; tatra-there; eva-indeed; sarva-päpaiù-of all sins; pramucyate-becomes freed.
Glorification of Käliya-hrada
In the same scripture it is said:
O earth-goddess, a person who goes to Käliya-hrada, bathes there and plays in the water, simply by
bathing becomes freed from all sins.
Text 388
värähe
käliyasya hradaà puëyam

asti guhyaà paraà mama
yaträhaà kréòaye nityaà
vimale yamunämbhasi
värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; käliyasya hradam-Käliya-hrada; puëyam-sacred; asti-is; guhyam-

secret; param-great; mama-My; yatra-where; aham-I; kréòaye-enjoy pastimes; nityam-eternally;
vimale-in the pure; yamunä-of the Yamunä; ambhasi-water.
Sacred Käliya-hrada, where I eternally play in the Yamuna's pure waters, is a great secret of Mine.
Text 389
taträbhiñekaà kurvéta
aho-rätroñito naraù
takñakasya gåhaà gatvä
mama loke mahéyate
tatra-there; abhiñekam-bath; kurvéta-does; ahaù-day; rätra-and night; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person;

takñakasya-of a carpenter; gåham-to the home;û gatvä-having gone; mama-My; loke-in the abode;
Even a person born in a carpenter's house, who fasts for a day and night and bathes there, is
Text 390-391
aträpi mahad äçcaryaà

paçyanti paëòitä naräù
käliya-hrada-pürveëa
kadambo mahato drumaù
çata-çäkho viçäläkñi
puñpaà surabhi-gandhi ca
sa ca dvädaça-mäsäni
manojïaù çubha-çétalaù
puñpäyati viçäläkñi
bhäsvaraàs tu diço daça
atra-here; api-also; mahad-great; äçcaryam-wonder; paçyanti-see; paëòitäù naräù-wise; käliya-

hrada-of Käliya-hrada;pürveëa-in the east; kadambaù-kadamba tree; mahataù-great; drumaù-tree; çata-
hundred; çäkhaù-branches; viçäla-large; äkñi-eyes; puñpam-flowers; surabhi-gandhi-fragrant; ca-and;
sah-it; ca-and; dvädaça-mäsäni-for 12 months; manojïaù'beautiful; çubha-pleasant; çétalaù-cool;
puñpäyati-blooms; viçäläkñi-O girl with the beautiful eyes; bhäsvaran-shining; tu-indeed; diçaù-
directions; daça-ten.
Wise men see a great wonder there. To the east of Käliya-hrada is a great kadamba tree. O girl with
beautiful, large eyes, this beautiful, splendidly white, pleasnatly cool, hundred-branched tree is filled
with fragrant flowers. O girl with beauitful, large eyes, this tree remains always in bloom through all
twelve months of the year, always filling the ten directions with its splendor.
Text 392
saura-puräne
tataù käliya-térthäkhyaà
térthaà aàho-vinäçanam
anåtyad yatra bhagavän
bälaù käliya-mastake
saura-puräne-in the Saura Puräëa; tataù-then; käliya-tértha-äkhyam-named Käliya-tértha; tértham-

holy place» aàhaù-sins; vinäçanam-destroying; anåtyad-danced; yatra-where; bhagavän-the Lord;
bälaù'a child; käliya-of Käliya; mastake-on the head.

Next is the holy place named Käliya-tértha, which destroys sins. There the Supreme Personality of
Godhead as boy danced on Käliya's head.
Text 393
tatra yas tu kåta-snäno

väsudevaà samarcayet
agaëya-janma-duñpräpaà
kåñëa-säyujyam açnute
tatra-there; yaù-who; tu-indeed; kåta-snänaù-bathes; väsudevam-Lord Väsudeva; samarcayet-

worships; agaëya-countless; janma-births; duñpräpam-difficult to attain; kåñëa-säyujyam-Kåñëa-sayuja
mukti; açnute-enjoys.
A person who bathes there and worships Lord Väsudeva attains kåñëa-säyujya-mukti, which is
difficult to attain even after countless births.
Text 394
atha dvädaçaditya-saàjïasyädi-värähe
sürya-térthe naraù snäto

dåñövädityaà vasundhare
äditya-bhavanaà präpya
kåta-kåtyaù sa modate
atha-now; dvädaçaditya-saàjïasya-Dvädaçäditya-tértha; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; sürya-
térthe-at Sürya-tértha; naraù-a person; snätaù-bathed; dåñövä-having seen; ädityam-the sun-god»
vasundhare-O earth; äditya-bhavanam-the sun-god's abode; präpya-attaining; kåta-kåtyaù'successful;
sah-he; modate-enjoys.
Glorification of Dvädaçäditya-tértha
O earth-goddess, a person who bathes at Sürya-tértha and sees the deity of the sun-god there, goes
to the sun-god's abode and becomes happy.
Text 395
äditye 'hani saìkräntäv

asmin térthe vasundhare
manasäbhépsitaà kämaà
sampräpnoti na saàçayaù
äditye ahani-on Sunday; saìkräntäv-on Sankranti; asmin-in this; térthe-holy place; vasundhare-O
earth; manasä-by the heart; abhépsitam-desired; kämam-desire;û sampräpnoti-atains; na-not; saàçayaù-
doubt.
O earth-goddess, a person (who bathes, at this holy place on a Sunday during a sankranti attains his
heart's desire. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 396
saura-puräne
dvädaçäditya-térthäkhyaà
térthaà tad anu pävakam
tasya darçana-mätreëa
nåëäm aàho vinaçyati
saura-puräne-in the Saura Puräëa; dvädaçäditya-térthäkhyam-named Dvädaçäditya-tértha; tértham-

holy place; tad-that; anu-following; pävakam-purifying; tasya-of it; darçana-mätreëa-simply by seeing;
nåëäm-of men; aàhaù-sin; vinaçyati-perishes.
Next is purifying Dvädaçäditya-tértha. Simply by seeing it, the sins of men become destroyed.
Text 397
athokta-kramaà yäträyäù kartavyopadeçaù. ädi-värähe
prathamaà madhuvanaà proktaà

dvädaçaà våndikävanam
etäni ye prapaçyanti
na te naraka-bhojinaù
atha-then; ukta-said; kramam-sequence; yäträyäù-of a visit; kartavya-to do; upadeçaù-teaching; ädi-

värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; prathamam-first; madhuvanam-Madhuvana; proktam-said;
dvädaçam-twelve; våndikävanam-Våndävana;û etäni-they; ye-who; prapaçyanti-see; na te-they;
naraka-hell; bhojinaù-experience.
Instruction to Visit the Twelve Forests of Våndävana
They who see the twelve forests of Våndävana, which begin with Madhuvana, will not go to hell.
Text 398
yathä-krameëa ye yäträà
vanänäà dvädaçasya tu
kariñyanti varärohe
yänti te brähmam älayam
yathä-krameëa-one by one; ye-who; yäträm-visit; vanänäm-of the forests; dvädaçasya-twelve; tu-

indeed; kariñyanti-will do; varärohe-O beautiful girl; yänti-attain; te-they; brähmam-spiritual; älayam-
abode.
O beautiful one, they who visit, one by one, the twelve forests (of Våndävana, go to the spiritual
abode.
Text 399
atha çré-govardhanasya
tatraiva asti govardhanaà näma

kñetraà parama-durlabham
mathurä-paçcime bhäge
adürad yojana-dvayam
atha-now; çré-govardhanasya-of Govarhana Hill; tatra-there; eva-indeed; asti-is; govardhanam-

Govardhana; näma-named; kñetram-place; parama-durlabham-very rare; mathurä-paçcime-west of
Mathurä; bhäge-O auspicious one; adürad'not far; yojana-dvayam-two yojanas.
Glorification of Çré Govardhana
In the same scripture (Adi Varaha Purana) it is said:
Two yojanas (16 miles), which is not very far, west of Mathura' is the very rare place named
Govardhana Hill.
Text 400
anna-küöaà tataù präpya

tasya kuryät pradakñiëam
na tasya punar ävåttir
devi sarvaà bravémi te
anna-küöam-Annaküö-tértha; tataù-then; präpya-attaining; tasya-of that; kuryät-may do;

pradakñiëam-circumambulation; na-not; tasya-of him; punar-again; ävåttir-return; devi-O goddess;
sarvam-everything; bravémi-I say; te-to you.
A person who circumambulates the place named Annaküöa-tértha does not return to this world. O
goddess, I will now tell you everything about it.
Text 401
snätvä mänasa-gaìgäyäà
dåñövä govardhane harim
annaküöaà parikramya
kià manaù paritapyase
snätvä-having bathed; mänasa-gaìgäyäm-in the manasa-gangä; dåñövä-having seen; govardhane-on

Govardhana Hill; harim-Lord Hari; annaküöam-Annaküöa-tértha; parikramya-circumambulating; kim-
what?; manaù-heart; paritapyase-suffers.
After bathing in the Manasa-gaìgä, seeing the Deity of Lord Hari on Govardhana Hill, and
circumambulating Annaküöa-tértha, what heart can remain unhappy?
Text 402
indrasya varñato 'ty-arthaà

gaväà péòä-karaà jalam
täsäà samrakñaëärthäya
dhåto giri-varo mayä
indrasya-of Indra; varñataù-rains; aty-artham-great; gaväm-of the cows; péòä-karam-tormenting»

jalam-water; täsäm-of them; samrakñaëärthäya-to protect; dhåtaù-held; giri-varaù-the âest of hills;
mayä-by Me.
To protect the cows distressed by Indra's torrential rains, I lifted Govardhana Hill.
Text 403
anna-küöa iti khyätaù

sarvataù çakra-püjitaù
soma-väre tö amävasyäà
präpya govardhanaà naraù
dattvä piëòän pitåbhyaç ca
räjasüya-phalaà labhet
anna-küöa iti khyätaùknown as Annaküöa-tértha; sarvataù-completely; çakra-by Indra; püjitaù-

worshiped; soma-väre-on Sunday; tu-indeed; amävasyäm-the new-moon; präpya-attaining;
govardhanam-Go9vardhana; naraù-a person; dattvä-giving; piëòän-piëòa; pitåbhyaù-to the pitäs; ca-
and; räjasüya-phalam-result of a räjasüya-yajna; labhet-attains.
The place where Indra worshiped Lord Kåñëa is famous as Annaküöa-tértha. A person who, on a
Sunday that is also a new-moon day, goes to Govardhana Hill and offers piëòa to his ancestors, attains
the result of offering a räjasüya-yajïa.
Text 404
govardhanaç ca bhagavän
yatra govardhano dhåtaù
rakñitä yädaväù sarva
indra-våñöi-niväraëät
skände mathurä-khaëòe-in the Skanda Puräëa, Mathura'-khaëòa; govardhanaù-Govardhana; ca-and;

bhagavän'the Lord; yatra-where; govardhanaù-Govardhana; dhåtaù-held; rakñitä-protected; yädaväù-
the Yadus; sarve-all; indra-of Indra; våñöi-the rain; niväraëät-because of stopping.
Govardhana Hill is an incarnation of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. When the Lord lifted the
hill, all the people of Vraja were saved from Indra's rains.
Text 405
aho govardhano viñëur

yatra tiñöhati sarvadä
yatra brahmä çivo lakñmér
vasaty eva na saàçayaù
ahaù-Oh; govardhanaù-Govardhana; viñëur-Lord Viñëu; yatra-where; tiñöhati-stays; sarvadä-

always; yatra-where; brahmä-Brahmä; çivaù-Çiva; lakñmér-Lakñmé; vasati-reside; eva-certainly; na-
not; saàçayaù-doubt.
Oh, Lord Viñëu stays eternally on Govardhana Hill. Brahmä, Çiva, and Lakñmé also reside there.
Text 406
värähe
asti govardhanaà näma

guhyaà kñetraà paraà mama
adüräd añöa-kroçat tu
mathuräyäç ca paçcime
värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; asti-is; govardhanam- näma-named Govardhana; guhyam-secret;
kñetram-place; param-transcendental; mama-My; adüräd-not far; añöa-kroçat-8 kroças; tu-indeed;
mathuräyäù-from Mathurä; ca-and; paçcime-west.
Eight kroças (16 miles), not very far, west of Mathura', is My very confidential place named
Govardhana.
Text 407
taträpi mahad äçcaryaà

yat paçyanti su-cetasaù
tasmin samvartate bhümir
sarva-bhägavata-priyam
tatra-there; api-also; mahad-great; äçcaryam-a wonder; yat-which; paçyanti-see; su-cetasaù'wise;

tasmin-there; samvartate-is; bhümir-place; sarva-bhägavata-priyam-dear to all the devotees.
The wise see a great wonder there. In that place is something dear to all the devotees.
Text 408
catur-viàçati-dvädaçyaà
tasmin çikhara-parvate
sthülän paçyanti dépän vai
dyotayanto diço daça
catur-viàçati-dvädaçyam-on Caturvimsati-dvädaçé; tasmin-there; çikhara-parvate-on the hill;

sthülän-great; paçyanti-see; dépän-lamps; vai-indeed; dyotayantaù-shining; diçaù-directions; daça-ten.
On Caturviàçati-dvädaçé the devotees see on Govardhana Hill many great lamps shining in the ten
directions.
Text 409
yaç ca tän paçyate dépän

mama karma-paräyaëaù
labhate paramäà siddhim
evam etän na saàçayaù
yaù-who; ca-and; tän-them; paçyate-sees; dépän-lamps; mama-My; karma-paräyaëaù'devoted to the

service; labhate-attains; paramäm-supreme; siddhim-perfection; evam-in this way;û etän-them; na-not;
saàçayaù-doubt.
They who, devoted to My service, see these lamps. attain the supreme perfection. Of this there is no
doubt.
Text 410
bhädre pärçva-parivartinyäm ekädaçyäà govardhana-yäträ. ädi-värähe
mäsi bhädra-pade yä tu
çuklä caikädaçé çubhä
govardhane sopaväsaù
kuryät tasya pradakñiëam
govardhanaà parikraman
dåñövä devaà harià prabhum
räjasüyaçvamedhäbhyäà
phalam präpnoty asaàçayaù
bhädre-in Bhadra; pärçva-parivartinyäm ekädaçyäm-on the çukla-ekädaçé; govardhana-to

Govardhana; yäträ-a visit; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; mäsi bhädra-pade-in the month of
Bhadra; yä-which; tu-indeed; çuklä-çukla; ca-and; ekädaçé-ekädaçé; çubhä-auspicious; govardhane-on
Govardhana Hill; sopaväsaù-with fasting; kuryät-does; tasya-of it; pradakñiëam-circumambulation;
govardhanam-Govardhana; parikraman-circumambulating; dåñövä-having seen; devam- harim-
prabhum-Lord Hari; räjasüya-rajasuya; açvamedhäbhyäm-an asvamedha sacrifices; phalam-result;
präpnoti-attains; asaàçayaù-without doubt.
Visiting Govardhana Hill During Ekädaçé in the Month of Bhädra (August-September)

On the auspicious çukla-ekädaçé in the month of Bhädra (August-September, one should fast and
circumambulate Govardhana Hill. After circumambulating Govardhana Hill and seeing the Deity of
Lord Hari there, one attains the result of having performed an räjasüya-yajïa and an açvamedha-yajïa.
Text 412
çré-daçame
hantäyam adrir abalä hari-däsa-varyo

yad räma-kåçëa-caraëa-sparaça-pramodaù
mänaà tanoti saha-go-gaëayos tayor yat
pänéya-süyavasa-kandara-kanda-mülaiù
hanta-oh» ayam-this» adrir-hill» abaläù-O friends» hari-däsa-varyaù-the best among the servants of
the Lord; yat-because; räma-kåçëa-caraëa-of the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa and Balaräma» sparaça-by
the touch» pramodaù-jubilant» mänam-respects» tanoti-ogfers» saha-with» go-gaëayoù-cows, calves,
and cowherd boys» tayoù-to Them (Sri Kåñëa and Balarama)» yat-because» pänéya-drinking water»
süyavasa-very soft grass» kandara-caves» kanda-mülaiù-and by roots.
In the Tenth Canto (10.21.18, of Srimad-Bhagavatam it is said:
Of all the devotees this Govardhana Hill is the best! O my friends, this hill supplies Kåñëa and
Balaräma, as well as Their calves, cows, and cowherd friends, with all kinds of necessities: water for
drinking, very soft grass, caves, fruits, flowers, and vegetables. In this way the hill offers respect to the
Lord. Being touched by the lotus feet of Kåñëa and Balaräma, Govardhana Hill appears very jubilant.*
Text 413
tatrastha-brahma-kuëòasya mathurä-khaëòe
tatra snätvä brahma-kuëòe

brahmaëä toñito hariù
indrädi-loka-pälänäà
jätäni ca saräàsi hi
tatra-there; stha-situated; brahma-kuëòasya-Brahma-kuëòa; mathurä-khaëòe-in the Mathura'-

khaëòa;û tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; brahma-kuëòe-in Brahma-kuëòa; brahmaëä-by Brahmä;
toñitaù-pleased; hariù-Lord Hari; indra-ädi-loka-pälänäm-of Indra and the other demigod planetary
rulers; jätäni'born; ca-and; saräàsi-lakes; hi-indeed.
Glorification of Brahma-kuëòa In That Place
After bathing in Brahma-kuëòa, Brahmä satisfied Lord Hari. Indra and other planetary rulers created
other lakes nearby.
Text 414
ädi-värähe
hradaà tatra mahä-bhäge

druma-gulma-latävåtam
catväri tatra térthäni
puëyäni ca çubhäni ca
ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; hradam-a lake; tatra-there; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one;
druma-gulma-latävåtam-surrounded by trees and vines; catväri-fourteen; tatra-there; térthäni puëyäni-
holy places; ca-and; çubhäni-auspicious; ca-and.
O auspicious one, that lake is surrounded by groves of trees and vines and by fourteen auspicious
holy places.
Text 415
aidraà pürvena pärçvena

yama-térthaà tu dakñiëe
väruëaà pascime térthaà
kauveraà cottareëa tu
tatra madhye sthitaç cähaà
kréòayiñye yad icchayä
aidram-Indra-tértha; pürvena-in the east; pärçvena-side; yama-tértham-Yama-tértha; tu-indeed;

dakñiëe-in the south; väruëam-Varuëa-tértha; pascime-in the west; tértham- kauveram-Kuvera-tértha;
ca-and; uttareëa-in the north; tu-indeed; tatra-there; madhye-in the middle; sthitaù-situated; ca-and;
aham-I; kréòayiñye-will enjoy pastimes; yad-which; icchayä-as I wish.
On the eastern side is Indra-tértha. On the south is Yama-tértha. On the west is Varuëa-tértha. On
the north is Kuvera-tértha. In these places I will enjoy pastimes as I wish.
Text 416
çré-govinda-kuëòasya mathurä-khaëòe
yaträbhiñikto bhagavän
maghonä yadu-vairiëä
govinda-kuëòaà taj-jätaà
snäna-mätreëa mokña-dam
çré-govinda-kuëòasya-Govinda-kuëòa; mathurä-khaëòe-in the Mathurä-khaëòa; yatra-where;

abhiñiktaù-bathed; bhagavän-the Lord; maghonä-by Indra; yadu-of the Yadus; vairiëä-the enemy;
govinda-kuëòam-Govinda-kuëòa; taê-jätam-born from that; snäna-mätreëa-simply by bathing; mokña-
dam-grants liberation.
Glorification of Çré Govinda-kuëòa

The Supreme Personality of Godhead was bathed by Indra, who had become the enemy of Vraja.
From that bathing Govinda-kuëòa, was created. Govinda-kuëòa grants liberation to those who do
nothing more than bathe in it.
Text 417
ädi-värähe
anna-küöasya sännidhye
térthaà çakra-vinirmitam
tasmin snäne tarpaëe ca
çata-kratu-phalaà labhet
ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; anna-küöasya-Annaküt„a; sännidhye-near; tértham-a holy

place; çakra-by Indra; vinirmitam-made; tasmin-there; snäne-in âathing; tarpaëe-pleasing; ca-and; çata-
kratu-phalam-result of a hundred yajnas; labhet-attains.
Near Annaküöa-tértha is the holy place (Govinda-kuëòa, that Indra made. A person who bathes
there and offers tarpaëa attains the result of performing a hundred yajïas.
Text 418
çré-rädhä-kuëòadikasyädi-värähe
ariñöa-rädhä-kuëòäbhyäà
snänät phalam aväpyate
räjasüyäçvamedhäbhyäà
nätra käryä vicäraëä
çré-rädhä-kuëòa-Rädha'-kuëòa; ädikasya-beginning with; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa;

ariñöa-rädhä-kuëòäbhyäm-Rädha'-kuëòa and Çyäma-kuëòa; snänät-from bathing; phalam-result;
aväpyate-is attained; räjasüya-açvamedhäbhyäm-of rajasuya and asvamedha yajnas; na-not; atra-here;
käryä-should be done; vicäraëä-doubt.
Glorification of Rädhä-kuëòa and Other Places
By bathing in Rädhä-kuëòa and Syama-kuëòa, one attains the result of having performed a räjasüya-
yajïa and an açvamedha-yajïa. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 419
mathurä-khaëòe
dépotsave kärttike ca
rädhä-kuëòe yudhiñöhira
dåçyate sakalaà viçvaà
bhåtyair viñëu-paräyaëaiù
mathurä-khaëòe-in the Mathura'-khaëòa; dépotsave-in the dépotsava festival; kärttike-during

Kärttika; ca-and; rädhä-kuëòe-at Rädha'-kuëòa; yudhiñöhira-O Yudhiñöhira; dåçyate-is seen; sakalam-
all; viçvam-the universe; bhåtyair-by servants; viñëu-to Lord Viñëu; paräyaëaiù-devoted.
O Yudhiñöhira, during the dépotsava festival Lord Viñëu's devoted servants at Rädhä-kuëòa can see
the entire universe.
Text 420
pädme kärttika-mähätmye
govardhane girau ramye

rädhä-kuëòaà priyaà hareù
kärttike bahuläñöamyäà
tatra snätvä hareù priyaù
pädme kärttika-mähätmye-in the Padma Puräëa, Kärttika-mähätmya; govardhane-on Govardhana;

girau-Hill; ramye'charming; rädhä-kuëòam-Rädhä-kuëòa; priyam-dear; hareù-to Hari; kärttike-in
Kärttika; bahuläñöamyäm-Bahulastami; tatra-there; snätvä-having bathed; hareù'to Lord Hari; priyaù-
dear.
Rädhä-kuëòa, by beautiful Govardhana Hill, is dear to Lord Hari. A person who bathes there on the
Bahuläñöamé day of the month of Kärttika is also dear to Lord Hari.
Text 421
naro bhakto bhaved vipräs
tat-sthitasya pratoñaëam
yathä rädhä priyä viñëos
tasyäù kuëòaà priyaà tathä
naraù-a person; bhaktaù-a devotee; bhaved-becomes; vipraùbrähmaëa; tat-sthitasya-staying there;

pratoñaëam-satisfaction; yathä-as; rädhä-Rädhä; priyä-is dear; viñëoùto Viñëu; tasyäù-Her; kuëòam-
lake; priyam-dear; tathä-in the same way.
O brähmaëas, a person who satisfies the residents of Rädhä-kuëòa becomes a great devotee. As
S"rématé Rädhä is dear to Lord Viñëu, so Her lake (Rädhä-kuëòa, is also dear to Him.
Text 422
sarva-gopéñu saivaikä
viñëor atyanta-vallabhä
tat-kuëòe kärttikäñöamyäà
tatra snätvä hareù priyaù
sarva-among all; gopéñu-the gopés; sä-She; eva-indeed; ekä-alone; viñëor-to Lord Viñëu; atyanta-
most; vallabhä-dear; tat-kuëòe-at Her lake; kärttika-of Kärttika; añöamyäm-on the astami day; tatra-
there; snätvä-having bathed; hareù-of Lord Hari;û priyaù-dear.
Among all the gopés, She is most dear to Lord Viñëu. A person who, on the añöamé day of the
month of Kärttika, bathes in Her lake, becomes dear to Lord Hari.
Text 423
natvä stutvä ca sampüjyo

deva-deva-janärdanaù
prabodhinyäà yathä-as; prétas
tathä prétas tato bhavet
natvä-offering obeisances; stutvä-offering prayers; ca-and; sampüjyaù-to be worshiped; deva-deva-

the master of the demigods; janärdanaù-Janärdana; prabodhinyäm-on Prabodhiné; yathä-as;
prétaùpleased; tathä-so; prétaù-pleased; tataù-then; bhavet-is.
As Lord Janärdana, the master of the demigods, is pleased by obeisances, prayers and worship
during the Prabodhiné day, so He is also pleased when these are done at Rädhä-kuëòa.
Text 424
athäkrüra-térthasya saura-puräëe
ananta-vasati-çreñöhaà
sarva-päpa-vinäçanam
akrüra-tértham aty-artham
asti priyataraà hareù
atha-now; akrüra-térthasya-of Akrüra-tértha; saura-puräëe-in the Saura Puräëa; ananta-limitless;

vasati-of abodes; çreñöham-the best; sarva-päpa-vinäçanam-destroying all sins; akrüra-tértham-Akrüra-
tértha; aty-artham asti priyataram-is very dear; hareù-to Lord Hari.
Glorification of Akrüra-tértha
The best of the Lord's numberless abodes and the destroyer of all sins, Akrüra-tértha is very dear to
Lord Hari.
Text 425
pürëimäyäà tu yaù snäyät

tatra tértha-vare naraù
sa mukta eva saàsärät
kärttikyäà tu viçeñataù
pürëimäyäm-on the full-moon day; tu-indeed; yaù-who; snäyät-bathes; tatra-there; tértha-vare-at the
best of holy places; naraù-a person; sah-he; muktah-liberated; eva-indeed; saàsärät-from birth and
death; kärttikyäm-during Kärttika; tu-indeed; viçeñataù-specifically.
A person who, on the full-moon day of the month of Kärttika, bathes at that very holy place,
becomes freed from the cycle of repeated birth and death.
Text 426
ädi-värähe
tértha-rajaà hi cäkrüraà
guhyänäà guhyam uttamam
tat-phalaà samaväpnoti
sarva-térthävagähanät
ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; tértha-rajam-the king of holy places; hi-indeed; ca-and;
akrüram-Akrüra; guhyänäm-of secrets; guhyam-secret; uttamam-supreme; tat-phalam-result;
samaväpnoti-atains; sarva-tértha-in all holy places; avagähanät-from bathing.

Akrüra-tértha is the king of holy places, the most confidential of confidential abodes. There one
attains the result of bathing in all other holy places.
Text 427
akrüre ca punaù snätvä

rähu-graste diväkare
räjasüyaçvamedhäbhyäà
phalaà präpnoti niçcitam
akrüre-at Akrüra-tértha; ca-and; punaù-again; snätvä-having bathed; rähu-graste diväkare-on a solar

eclipse; räjasüya-açvamedhäbhyäm-of a rajasuya and asvamedha sacrifice; phalam-result; präpnoti-
attains; niçcitam-certainly.
A person who, during a solar eclipse, bathes in Akrüra-tértha, certainly attains the result of
performing a räjasüya-yajïa and an açvamedha-yajïa.
Text 428
atha bhäëòägärasya värähe
bhäëòägäram iti khyätaà

guhyam ati tato mama
labhante manujä bhümi
siddhià tatra na saàçayaù
atha-now; bhäëòägärasya-of Bhandagara-tértha; värähe-in the Varäha Puräëa; bhäëòägäram-

Bhandagara-tértha; iti-thus; khyätam-celebrated; guhyam-confidential; ati-very; tataù-then; mama-My;
labhante-attain; manujäh-people; bhümi-on the earth; siddhim-perfection» tatra-there; na-not;
saàçayaù-doubt.
Glorification of Bhäëòägära-tértha
O earth-goddess, the place known as Bhäëòägära-tértha is My confidential abode. In Bhäëòägära-

tértha people attain perfection. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 429-431
tatra kuëòaà mahä-bhäge

druma-gulma-latävåtam
tatra snänaà prakurvéta
aho-rätroñito naraù
lokaà vaidyädharaà gatvä
modate kåta-niçcayaù
taträçcaryaà pravakñyämi
bhümi guhyaà paraà mama
catur-viàçati-dvädaçyaà mama bhakti-vayavsthitäù

ardha-rätreñu çåëvanti
gétaà karëa-sukhävaham
tatra-there; kuëòam-lake; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; druma-gulma-latävåtam-surrounded by

trees and vines; tatra-there; snänam-bath; prakurvéta-does; ahaù-day; rätra-and night; uñitaù-fasting;
naraù-a person; lokam- vaidyädharam-Vidyadharaloka; gatvä-having gone; modate-enjoys; kåta-
niçcayaù-determined; tatra-there; äçcaryam-a wonder; pravakñyämi-I will describe; bhümi-on the
earth; guhyam-secret; param-great; mama-My; catur-viàçati-dvädaçyam-on caturvimsati-dvädaçé;
mama-My; bhakti-vayavsthitäù-situated in devotion; ardha-half; rätreñu-in nights; çåëvanti-hear;
gétam-sing; karëa-to the ears; sukha-happiness; avaham-carrying.
O auspicious one, that lake is surrounded by groves of trees and vines. A person who, fasting for a
day and a night, bathes there, goes to Vidyädharaloka, where enjoys great happiness. O earth-goddess,
I shall now tell you a wonderful secret. At this place, on caturviàçati-dvädaçé, my devotees stay awake,
in the middle of the night hearing songs about Me that bring pleasure to the ears.
Text 432
atha nandéçvarasya çré-daçame
puëyä bata vraja-bhuvo yad ayaà nå-liìgo

güòhaù puräëa-puruño vana-citra-mälyaù
gäù pälayan saha-balaù kvaëayaàç ca veëuà
vikréòayäïcati giritra-ramärcitäìghriù
atha-now; nandéçvarasya-of Nandéçvara; çré-daçame-in the Tenth Canto; puëyä-sacred; bata-

indeed; vraja-bhuvaù-of the land of Vraja; yad-whéh; ayam-this; nr„-liìgaù-in a human form; güòhaù-
concealed; puräëa-puruñaù-the ancient Supreme Person; vana-citra-mälyaù-wearing wonderful
garlands of forest-flowers; gäù-the cows; pälayan-protecting; saha-balaù-with Balaräma; kvaëayan-
playing; ca-and; veëum-the flute; vikréòayä-playfully; aïcati'tilting; giritra-by Çiva; ramä-and Lakñmé;
arcita-worshiped; aìghriù-feet.
Glorification of Nandéçvara-tértha
In the Tenth Canto (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 10.44.13, it is said:

Dear friends, just imagine how fortunate the land of Våndävana is where the Supreme Personality of
Godhead Himself is present, always decorated with flower garlands and engaged in tending cows along
with His brother, Lord Balaräma. He is always accompanied by His cowherd boy friends, and He plays
His transcendental flute. The residents of Våndävana are fortunate to be able to constantly see the lotus
feet of Kåñëa and Balaräma, which are worshiped by great demigods like Lord Çiva and Brahmä and
the goddess of fortune.*
Text 433
tathä ca paöhanti
pävane sarasi snätvä

kåñëaà nandéçvare girau
dåñövä nandaà yaçodäà ca
sarväbhéñöam aväpnuyät
tathä-so; ca-and; paöhanti-read; pävane sarasi-in Pävana-sarovara; snätvä-having bathed; kåñëam-

Kåñëa; nandéçvare-in Nandéçvara; girau-hill; dåñövä-having seen; nandam-Nanda;
yaçodäm-Yaçoda; ca-and; sarva-all; abhéñöam-desires; aväpnuyät-attains.
In the Vedéc literatures it is said:
A person who bathes in Pävana-sarovara on Nandéçvara Hill and sees the Deities of Nanda and
Yaçodä, attains all his desires.
Text 434
çakaöärohanasyädi-värähe
çakaöärohanaà näma
tasmin kñetre paraà mama
mathurä-paçcime bhäge
adüräd ardha-yojane
çakaöärohanasya-of Sakaöärohana-tértha; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; çakaöärohanam-

näma-named Çakaöärohana-tértha; tasmin-in this; kñetre-place; param-transcendental; mama-My;
mathurä-paçcime-to the west of Mathurä; bhäge-O auspicious one; adüräd-not far; ardha-yojane-half a
yojana.
Glorification of Çakaöärohana-tértha
Half a yojana (4 miles), not far, west of Mathura' is My holy place named Çakaöärohana-tértha.
Text 435
anekäni sahasräëi
bhramaräëäà vasanti vai
taträbhiñekaà kurvéta
eka-rätroñito naraù
sa tu vaidyädharaà lokaà
gatvä tu ramate sukham
anekäni-many; sahasräëi-thousands; bhramaräëäm-of bees; vasanti-live; vai-indeed; tatra-there;

abhiñekam-bath; kurvéta-does; eka-rätra-for one night; uñitaù-fasting; naraù-a person; sah-he; tu-
indeed» vaidyädharam- lokam-to Vidyadharaloka; gatvä-having gone; tu-indeed; ramate-enjoys;
sukham-happiness.
Many thousands of bees reside there. A person who, fasting for one night, bathes there, goes to
Vidyädharaloka, where he enjoys great happiness.
Text 436
taträpi mahad äçcaryaà

paçyanti pathi saàsthitäù
sarva-puñpa-varaà kuëòaà
mägha-mäse tu dvädaçé
tatra-there; api-also; mahad-a great; äçcaryam-wonder; paçyanti-see; pathi-on the pathway;

saàsthitäù-situated; sarva-puñpa-varam-filled with all flowers; kuëòam-lake; mägha-mäse-in the month
of Mägha; tu-indeed; dvädaçé-on the dvädaçé.
Travelers on the pathways there see a great wonder. On the dvädaçé of the month of Mägha
(January-February, they see the lake there filled with every kind of flower.
Text 437
atha grahaëa-snänädy-artham keñucit tértheñu kurukñetratväti-deçaù. ädi-värähe
govardhanaà tathäkrüraà
dve koöé dakñiëottare
praskandanaà ca bhäëòéraà
kurukñetra-samäni sat
atha-now; grahaëa-snänädy-artham-for bathing; keñucit'certain; tértheñu-holy places;

kurukñetratväti-deçaù-are like Kurukñetra; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa; govardhanam-
Govardhana; tathä-then; akrüram-Akrüra-tértha; dve-two; koöé'sides; dakñiëa-south; uttare-north;
praskandanam-Praskandana-tértha; ca-and; bhäëòéram-Bhandira; kurukñetra-Kurukñetra; samäni-
equal; sat-being.
Some of These Holy Bathing-places Are Like Kurukñetra
With Govardhana and Akrüra-tértha on the south and north, and Praskandana-tértha and Bhäëòéra
on the other sides, the area is like Kurukñetra.
Text 438
atha yathärtha-kathanaà tatraiva
asi-kuëòaà ca vaikuëöhaà
koöi-térthottamaà tadä
avimuktaà soma-térthaà
saàyamanaà tindukaà tathä
cakra-térthaà tathäkrüraà
dvädaçäditya-saàjïakam
ete puëyäù paviträç ca
mahä-pätaka-näçanäù
atha-now; yathärtha-appropriate; kathanam-description; tatra-there; eva-indeed; asi-kuëòam-Asi-

kuëòa; ca-and; vaikuëöham-Vaikuëöha-tértha; koöi-tértha-Koöi-tértha; uttamam-after; tadä-then;
avimuktam-Avimukta-tértha; soma-tértham-Soma-tértha; saàyamanam-Samyamana-tértha; tindukam-
Tinduka-tértha; tathä-then; cakra-tértham-Cakra-tértha; tathä-then; akrüram-Akrüra-tértha;
dvädaçäditya-saàjïakam'the place named Dvädaçäditya-tértha; ete-these; puëyäù-sacred; paviträù-pure;
ca-and; mahä-great; pätaka-sins; näçanäù-destroying.
These Places Are Like Kurukñetra
In the same scripture it is said:
The places are: Asi-kuëòa, Vaikuëöha-tértha, Koöi-tértha, Avimukta-tértha, Soma-tértha,

Samyamana-tértha, Tinduka-tértha, Cakra-tértha, Akrüra-tértha, and Dvädaçäditya-tértha. These
purifying sacred places destroy the greatest sins.
Text 439
kurukñeträ chata-guëä
mathuräyäà na saàçayaù
kurukñeträc-than Kurukñetra; chata-guëä-a hundred times» mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; na-not;
saàçayaù-doubt.
These places in Mathura' are a hundred times more sacred than Kurukñetra. Of this there is no
doubt.
Text 440
ye paöhanti mahä-bhäge
çåëvanti ca samähitäù
mathuräyäç ca mähätmyaà
te yänti paramäà gatim
ye-who; paöhanti-who read; mahä-bhäge-O auspicious one; çåëvanti-hear; ca-and; samähitäù-

assembled; mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; ca-and; mähätmyam-glorification;- te-they; yänti-attain; paramäm-
gatim-the supreme destination.
O fortunate one, they who read or hear of the glories of Mathura' go to the supreme destination.
Text 441
te kuläni tärayanti
dve çate pakñayor dvayoù
mähätmya-çravaëäd eva
nätra käryä vicäraëä
te-they; kuläni-relatives; tärayanti-liberate; dve çate-two hundred; pakñayor dvayoù'on both sides;
mähätmya-of the glories; çravaëäd-by hearing; eva-indeed; na-not; atra-here; käryä-to be done;
vicäraëä-doubt.
By hearing the glories of Mathurä, the listeners liberate two hundred relatives on both sides of their
families. Of this there is no doubt.
Text 442 and 443
mathurä-mahä-térthäni
viçräntir asi-kuëòaà ca
vaikuëöho dhruva eva ca
kåñëa-gaìgä cakra-térthaà
sarasvatyäç ca saìgamaù
catuù-sämudrikaù küpo
gokarëäkhya-çivas tathä
govardhano nanda-gåhaà
vatsa-kréòanakas tathä
vanäni dvädaça tathä mahä-térthäni mäthure
mathurä-of Mathurä; mahä-the great; térthäni-holy places; viçräntir-Viçränti-tértha; asi-kuëòam-

Asi-kuëòa; ca-and; vaikuëöhaù-Vaikuëöha-tértha; dhruva-Dhruva-tértha; eva-certainly; ca-and; kåñëa-
gaìgä-the Kåñëa-gaìgä; cakra-tértham-Cakra-tértha; sarasvatyäù-the Sarasvaté; ca-and; saìgamaù-
saìgama» catuù-sämudrikaù küpaù-Catuh-samudrika-kupa; gokarëäkhya-çivaù-Gokarëaküpa; tathä-
then; govardhanaù-Govardhana; nanda-gåham-Nanda's home; vatsakréòanakaù-Vatsakridanaka; tathä-
then; vanäni-forests; dvädaça-twelve; tathä'then; mahä-térthäni-great holy places; mäthure-in Mathurä.
The Great Holy Places of Mathurä
Viçränti-tértha, Asi-kuëòa, Vaikuëöha-tértha, Dhruva-tértha, Kåñëa-gaìgä, Cakra-tértha, Sarasvaté-

saìgama, Catuù-sämudrika-küpa, Gokarëa-çiva, Govardhana Hill, Nanda's home, Vatsa-kréòana-tértha,
and the twelve forests, are the great holy places in Mathurä.
Text 444
atha mäthure deva-väräù
näräyaëänya-paryäyaù
keçavo madhya-saàsthitaù
svayambhüù padmanäbhaç ca
dérgha-viñëur gataçramaù
govindo hari-varähäv
iti mathurä-devatäù
atha-now; mäthure-in Mathurä; deva-väräù-the great Deities; näräyaëänya-paryäyaù-beginning with

Lord Nära'yaëa; keçavaù-Keçava; madhya-saàsthitaù-in the middle; svayambhüù-Svayambhü;
padmanäbhaù-Padmanäbha; ca-and; dérgha-viñëur-Dérgha-Viñëu; gataçramaù-Lord Gataçrama;
govindaù-Govinda; hari+hari; varähau-and Varäha; iti-thus; mathurä-in Mathurä; devatäù-the Deities.
The Deities of Mathurä
Näräyaëa, Keçava, Svayambhü, Padmanäbha, Dérgha-Viñëu, Gataçrama, Govinda, Hari, and

Varäha, are the Deities of Mathurä.
Text 445
mathuräyäs tu mähätmyaà
sa-vanäyä mahädbhutam
gopalottara-täpanyäm anyad apy asti kértanam
mathuräyäù-of Mathurä; tu-indeed; mähätmyam-glorification;- sa-vanäyäh-with its forests; mahä-

adbhutam-great wonder; gopala-uttara-täpanyäm-in Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad, Chapter Two; anyad-
another; api-also; asti-is; kértanam-glorification.
This is the wonderful glorification of Mathura' and its forests. Further glorification is in the Gopäla-
täpané Upaniñad, Chapter Two.
Text 446
térthäny uktäni bhüréëi

puräneñö atra mäthure
khyätäny evädhunä teñäà
likhitänéha känicit
térthäni-holy places; uktäni-described; bhüréëi-many; puräneñu-in the Puräëa; atra-here; mäthure'in

Mathurä; khyätäni-famous; eva-indeed; adhunä-now; teñäm-of them; likhitäni-have been written; iha-
here; känicit-some.
Many holy places in Mathurä are described in the Puräëas. Some of the more famous of them have
been written here.

Mathura Mahatmya

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mathura Mahatmya

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mathura Mahatmya

harir api bhajamänebhyaù

harir-Hari; api-even; bhajamänebhyaù -worshiping; präyaù-for the most part; muktim-liberation;

dhanyänäm-of the fortunate; hådayänanda-bliss to the hearts; pradam-giving; saìgåhyate-collected;

taträsyäù päpa-häritvam. ädi-värähe

tatra-there; äsyäù-of that; päpa-häritvam-removal of sin; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa;

Mathura' Removes Sins

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

My abode of Mathura'-maëòala is 20 yojanas in circumferance. A person who stays there becomes

pade pade tértha-phalaà

sarva-dharma-vihinänäm-devoid of religion; puruñänäm- of persons; durätmanäm-wicked;

süryodare tamo naçyed

tattva-jïänad yathä duhkhaà

süryodare-in the sunrise; tamaù-darkness; naçyed-destroyed; yathä-as; vajra-bhayän-from fear of the

çraddhayä-with faith; bhakti-yuktaù-and devotion; ca-and; gatvä-going; madhupurém-to Mathurä;

mathurä-snäna-kämasya-of a person who desires to bathe in Mathurä; gacchataù-going; tu-indeed;

anusaìgena-contact; gacchan-going; hi-indeed; vänijyena-on business; api-even; sevayä-with

nämäni gåhëatäm asyäù

nämäni-names; gåhëatäm-taking; asyäù-of it; sadä-always; eva-indeed; tu-certainly; amhasaù'sins;

yaù çåëoti varärohe

tri-rätram api ye tatra

tri-rätram-three nights; api-even; ye-who; tatra-there; vasanti-reside; manujäh-people; mune'O sage;

pädme pätäla-khaëòe hara-gauré-samväde

pädme-in the Padma Puräëa; pätäla-khaëòe-Patala-khaëòa; hara-gauré-samväde-in the conversation

yathä-as; tåëa-samüham-grass; tu-indeed; jvälayanti-burns; sphuliìgikäù-sparks; tathä-so;

hådyaà madhuvanaà präyo

skände-in the Skanda Puräëa; käçé-khaëòe-Kasi-khaëòa; hådyam-charming; madhuvanam-

In the Skanda Puräëa, Käçé-khaëòa, it is said:

atha puëya-pradatvaà yathä ädi-värähe

yat puëyam açvamedhena

atha-now; puëya-pradatvam-granting pious merit; yathä-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha Puräëa;

Mathura' Grants Pious Merit

snänena-by bathing; sarva-térthänäm-of all holy places; yat-what; syät-is; sukåta-saïcayaù'piety;

caturëäm api vedänäà

svodbhava-päpa-häritvam. yathä ädi-värähe

anyatra hi kåtaà päpaà

svodbhava-manifest in itself; päpa-sins; häritvam-removal; yathä-as; ädi-värähe-in the Ädi-varäha

Mathura' Removes the Sins Performed There

This is described in the Ädi-varäha Purana:

mathuräyäà kåtaà päpaà

mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; kåtam-done; päpam-sins; mathuräyäm-in Mathurä; vinaçyati-perishs;

yatra kåñëena saïcérëaà

yatra-where; kåñëena-by Kåñëa; saïcérëam-filled; kréòitam-enjoyed pastimes; ca-and; yathä-

eñä divyä puré devi

eñä-this; divyä-transcendental; puré-city; devi-O goddess; nitya-kälam-eternally; su-gopitä-hidden;

na mayä kathitaà devi

na-not; mayä-by Me; kathitam-described; devi-O goddess; brahmaëaù-Brahmä; ca-and;

anyatra-in another place; daçabhir varñaiù-for 10 years; prärabdham-beginnings; bhujyate-

atha sarva-térthädhikatvam. yatha ädi-värähe

Mathurä Is the Best of All Sacred Places

In the Ädi-varäha Puräëa it is said:

naimiñaà puñkaraà caiva

tatra-there; dharaëé-of the earth; praçnaù-question; naimiñam-Naimiñäraëya; puñkaram-Puñkara;

The the Earth-goddess Asked:

çré-varähenoktam mathureti su-vikhyätam

çré-varähena-by Lord varäha; uktam-said; mathurä-Mathurä; iti-thus; su-vikhyätam-famous; asti'is;

Lord Varäha said:

sarveñäà devi térthänäà

sarveñäm-of all; devi-o goddess; térthänäm-holy place; mathuräm-Mathurä; paramäm-best; mahat-

cakräìkitaà hi tat sarvaà kåñëasyaiva padena tu

yäni térthäni täny eva

yäni-which; térthäni-holy place; täni-they; eva-indeed; sthapitäni-established; majarñibhiù-by great

na-not; tértham-holy place; mathuräyäh-than Mathurä; hi-indeed; na-not; devaù-demigod; keçavät-

çåëu tattvena me bhümi